Sie sind auf Seite 1von 120

TX-SR805_875_En.

book Page 1 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

4
? t =33
Contents
p
ph
ic .
AV Receiver t op
wIntroduction
v i e
.fr/
..................................... 2

ees
o u p
-g r
s
TX-SR805 w .co mma
n d e Connection .................................... 20

: / / ww
ht tp
TX-SR875 Turning On & First Time Setup..... 44

Instruction Manual
Basic Operation
Playing your AV components ....... 62
Listening to the Radio .................. 63

Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 71


Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver. Advanced Operation ..................... 86
Please retain this manual for future reference.

Troubleshooting .......................... 113

En
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 2 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

WARNING: WARNING AVIS

34
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE

=3
DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS

p?t
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

. ph
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

ic
op
CAUTION: presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

wt
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

v i e
fr/exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
.The
persons.
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
ee s intended to alert the user to the presence of important
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
o u p
PERSONNEL.
-g r
s
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

n d e the literature accompanying the appliance.

mma
Important w
Safety .co
w Instructions
p /winstructions.
:/these
t
1.
t
h Keep these instructions.
Read
2.
15. Damage Requiring Service
Unplug the apparatus from the wall outlet and refer
3. Heed all warnings. servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
4. Follow all instructions. A. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
5. Do not use this apparatus near water. B. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen
6. Clean only with dry cloth. into the apparatus,
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in C. If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. water,
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radia- D. If the apparatus does not operate normally by
tors, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus following the operating instructions. Adjust only
(including amplifiers) that produce heat. those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or controls may result in damage and will often
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two require extensive work by a qualified technician
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding to restore the apparatus to its normal operation,
type plug has two blades and a third grounding E. If the apparatus has been dropped or damaged in
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are pro- any way, and
vided for your safety. If the provided plug does not F. When the apparatus exhibits a distinct change in
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for performance this indicates a need for service.
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
16. Object and Liquid Entry
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or Never push objects of any kind into the apparatus
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience recepta- through openings as they may touch dangerous volt-
cles, and the point where they exit from the appara- age points or short-out parts that could result in a
tus. fire or electric shock.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
manufacturer. splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
12. Use only with the cart, stand, PORTABLE CART WARNING vases shall be placed on the apparatus.
tripod, bracket, or table spec- Don’t put candles or other burning objects on top of
ified by the manufacturer, or this unit.
sold with the apparatus. 17. Batteries
When a cart is used, use cau- Always consider the environmental issues and fol-
tion when moving the cart/ low local regulations when disposing of batteries.
apparatus combination to 18. If you install the apparatus in a built-in installation,
avoid injury from tip-over. S3125A
such as a bookcase or rack, ensure that there is ade-
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or quate ventilation.
when unused for long periods of time. Leave 20 cm (8") of free space at the top and sides
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. and 10 cm (4") at the rear. The rear edge of the shelf
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been or board above the apparatus shall be set 10 cm (4")
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or away from the rear panel or wall, creating a flue-like
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects gap for warm air to escape.
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.

2
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 3 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Precautions
For U.S. models
34
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use

=3
p?t
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
FCC Information for User

ph
out the permission of the copyright holder.
CAUTION:
ic .
op
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-

wt
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact The user changes or modifications not expressly

v i e
approved by the party responsible for compliance could

.fr/
your Onkyo dealer.

es
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
p e
ou This equipment has been tested and found to comply
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft NOTE:
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
-g r
d e s
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
n
ma
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin- Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

.co m
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

w
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let- ence in a residential installation.

/ ww
tering. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

tp : /
ht
4. Power frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
WARNING dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE ence to radio communications. However, there is no
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC- guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
TION CAREFULLY. installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. ference to radio or television reception, which can be
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz). one or more of the following measures:
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug • Increase the separation between the equipment and
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times. receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
For North American model
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended cian for help.
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands For Canadian Models
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
dealer. For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
6. Handling Notes CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi- FULLY INSERT.
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on Modèle canadien
the case. REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
after prolonged use. This is normal. NMB-003 DU CANADA.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
be sure to use it occasionally. TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.

3
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 4 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Precautions—Continued

For British models


=334
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
php?t
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
ic .
qualified service personnel.
wtop
v i e
.fr/
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
ees
with the following code:
o u p
Blue: Neutral
-g r
Brown: Live
d e s
n
ma
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

m
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured mark-

.co
ings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as
w
ww
follows:

: / /
tp
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to

ht
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for
the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.

For European Models


Declaration of Conformity
We, ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
corresponding technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY

K. MIYAGI
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH

4
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 5 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Contents

34
Features ............................................................ 6 Analog Input Setup ............................................... 54

=3
p?t
Supplied Accessories ...................................... 7 Automatic Speaker Setup

ph
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 8 (Audyssey MultEQ XT) ..................................... 55
TV Format Setup
ic .
op
Getting to Know the AV Receiver ................... 9

wt
(not North American models) ............................ 60
Front Panel ..............................................................9
i e
AM Frequency Step Setup
v
.fr/
Display ..................................................................11
(on some models) ............................................... 61
Rear Panel .............................................................12
ee s
Playing Your AV Components .......................62
Remote Controller .......................................... 14
o u pBasic AV Receiver Operation .............................. 62

-g
Installing the Batteries ...........................................14
r
s
Listening to the Radio ....................................63
e
Using the Remote Controller ................................14
n d Listening to AM/FM Stations ............................... 63

ma
About the Remote Controller Modes ....................15
Using RDS (not North American model) ............. 65
m
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode ......................................15

.co
DVD Mode ............................................................17 Presetting AM/FM Stations .................................. 67
w
ww
CD/MD/CDR Modes ............................................18 Common Functions ........................................68

: / /
DOCK Mode .........................................................19 Setting the Display Brightness ............................. 68

ht tp
Connecting Your Speakers ........................... 20
Enjoying Home Theater ........................................20
Adjusting Speaker Levels ..................................... 68
Muting the AV Receiver ...................................... 68
Connecting Your Speakers ....................................21 Using the Sleep Timer .......................................... 69
Bi-amping the Front Speakers ...............................23 Using Headphones ................................................ 69
Bridging the Front Speakers (TX-SR875 only) ....24 Displaying Source Information ............................ 69
Selecting Audio Inputs ......................................... 70
Connecting Antennas .................................... 25
Specifying the Digital Signal Format ................... 70
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna .....................25
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna .......................25 Using the Listening Modes ............................71
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna ....................26 Selecting the Listening Modes ............................. 71
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna ...................26 Listening Modes Available for Each Source
Format ................................................................ 72
Connecting Your Components ..................... 27
About the Listening Modes .................................. 76
About AV Connections .........................................27
Connecting Audio and Video Signals Recording ........................................................79
to the AV Receiver .............................................28 Recording the Input Source .................................. 79
Which Connections Should I Use? .......................28 Recording from Different AV Sources ................. 79
Connecting a TV or Projector ...............................30 Onscreen Setup Menus ..................................80
Connecting a DVD player .....................................31 Menu Map ............................................................ 80
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback .............33 Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................81
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording ...........34 Using the Re-EQ Function ................................... 81
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Using the Late Night Function ............................. 81
Set-top box or Other Video Source ....................35 Audio Adjust ........................................................ 82
Connecting Components with HDMI ...................36 Listening Mode Presets ........................................ 84
Connecting a Game Console .................................38 Advanced Setup ..............................................86
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Speaker Setup ....................................................... 86
Component ..........................................................39 Source Setup ......................................................... 93
Connecting a CD Player ........................................40 Miscellaneous Setup ............................................. 96
Connecting a Turntable .........................................40 Hardware Setup .................................................... 98
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, Lock Setup .......................................................... 100
or DAT Recorder ................................................41 Zone 2 and Zone 3 ........................................101
Connecting a Power Amplifier ..............................41 Connecting Zone 2 ............................................. 101
Connecting an RI Dock .........................................42 Connecting Zone 3 ............................................. 102
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components Powered Zone 2 Setting ...................................... 103
(North American and European models only).......42 Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ................................ 104
Connecting Onkyo Components .....................43 Using Zone 2 and Zone 3 ................................... 104
Connecting the Power Cord ..................................43 Using the Remote Controller in Zone 2/3
Turning On the AV Receiver .......................... 44 and Multiroom Control Kits ............................. 107
Turning On and Standby .......................................44 Controlling Other Components ...................108
First Time Setup ............................................. 45 Entering Remote Control Codes ......................... 108
Speaker Settings ....................................................45 Resetting the Remote Controller ........................ 109
HDMI Monitor Setup ............................................46 Learning Commands .......................................... 111
HDMI Input Setup .................................................48 Using Macros ...................................................... 112
Component Video Input Setup ..............................50 Troubleshooting ...........................................113
Changing the Input Display ..................................51
Specifications ...............................................117
Digital Input Setup ................................................52

5
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 6 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Features
Amplifier Tuner
= 3 34
t
? only)
psold
h
• 7-channel amplifier • XM*8 Satellite Radio ready (N. America

i c p
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock .required;
p
• 130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 separately.
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
* SiriusConnectie w to
• SIRIUS*9 Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)

r/v
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% Home tuner kit required; sold separately.
(FTC)
e s . f
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. America only)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry e• 40 AM/FM presets (Other)
up• AM/FM auto tuning
ro
s-g
• Powered Zone 2 capability
e
and
• Bi-amp capability for front speakers • RDS radio data (Europe only)

m
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)

.com
• Direct tuning
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) trans-
former
w w Others
://w
http
• Color-coded speaker terminal posts • Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction*10
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus
Processing
• IR IN and OUT
• THX*1 Surround EX • Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other
• THX Ultra2*1 certified AV components, with Learning and Macro functions
• Dolby*2 Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx TX-SR875 Only
• DTS*3, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD • 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24, ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
DTS Neo:6 with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%
• Neural Surround*4, THX-Neural (FTC)
• Theater-Dimensional*5 virtual surround sound • Zone 2 composite video output
• DSD Direct • 4 HDMI inputs, 1 output (Version 1.3a)
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters • Bridging capability for front speakers
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing • HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
• Re-EQ*6 function and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)
• Tone control on all channels (7.1) • VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all chan-
• 7-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer nels

Audio/Video *1
• Zone 2 with 12V trigger, level, tone, balance, and pre
out
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and pre out
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX
• 3 HDMI*7 inputs, 1 output (Version 1.3a) is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,
*2
and component video sources (720p capable)
• Component video upconversion of composite video Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
and S-Video sources “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos- of Dolby Laboratories.
ite video conversion
*3
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)
• 3 component video inputs, 1 output “DTS” and “DTS-HD Master Audio” are trademarks of DTS,
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs Inc.

• RS-232 control *4
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input
• 7.1-channel pre out Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

6
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 7 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Features—Continued Supplied Accessories

34
Make sure you have the following accessories:

=3
*5

ph p?t
.
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.

op ic
wt
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX

e
Ltd.

v i
*7
.fr/
es controller and three batteries (AA/R6)
p e
ou
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter- Remote

-g
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
r
ing, LLC.

d e s
n
ma
*8

m
.cofoXM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005
XM Satellite Radio w
®
XM Ready is a trademark

ww
Speaker setup microphone

/ /
Inc. All rights reserved.
:
*9
http
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks Indoor FM antenna
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

*10

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.


and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-
mark of Audyssey Laboratories. AM loop antenna

THX Ultra2
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod- Power cord
uct feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guar- (Power cord varies from country to country.)
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase
will give you superb performance for many years to
Front
Left
SP-B / Zone 2
Left

Front
Right
SP-B / Zone 2
Front

Right
Left

SP-B / Zone 2

Center

Center
Left
Front

SP-B / Zone 2

Surround
Left
Surround
Left
Right

Surround
Right
Surround
Right
Right

Surround Back

Zone 2
Left

Surround Back

Zone 2
Right
Left
Surround Back
Left
Zone 2
Left

Right
Surround Back
Right
Zone 2
Right

come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of


Surround Back

Surround Back

Surround Back

Surround Back
SP-B / Zone 2

SP-B / Zone 2
SP-B / Zone 2

SP-B / Zone 2

Surround

Surround

Surround

Surround

parameters, including power amplifier performance,


Zone 2

Zone 2
Zone 2

Zone 2
Center

Center
Right

Right
Right

Right

Right

Right

Right

Right

Right

Right
Front

Front
Front

Front
Left

Left
Left

Left

Left

Left

Left

Left

Left

Left

1
2

and pre-amplifier performance and operation for 3

both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receiv-


Speaker Cable

ers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,


Speaker cable labels
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
* In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
* “Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation. name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same
regardless of color.
* “Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
* Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.

This product incorporates copyright protection tech-


nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macro-
vision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.

7
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 8 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Multiroom Capability

34
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels) in

=3
p?t
your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo

ph
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3 (external power amplifier required). And, you can select a different
audio source for each room.
i c .
w op(see pages 21–22).
t71–78).
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback
e
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THXi(pages
r/v (see page 101).
s . f
eeplayback (see page 101).
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel p
u
o stereo playback (see page 102).
stereo

s - g2rand
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel

nde
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone Zone 3.

m a
c o m
w w. Main Room
:// w
http
Surround back left and right
speakers
Front left and right speakers *While Powered Zone 2 is being
used, nothing is output by these
speakers (page 103).

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround left and right speakers

Zone 2 Room Zone 3 Room

Left and right Left and right


stereo speakers stereo speakers

8
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 9 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver


Front Panel
=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
3 Not North American model
wt 8 op
1 2 45 6 7
v i e
.fr/
9

ee s
o u p
s - gr
MASTER VOLUME

nd e
ma
STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

.co m
w
READY

ww
ZONE 2

: / /
ZONE 3

ht tp PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

J K L Front flap Push here to open


the flap

The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.


A STANDBY/ON button (44) I MASTER VOLUME control (62)
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby. Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –∞ dB,
B STANDBY indicator (44) –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and play).
flashes while a signal is being received from the The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
remote controller. lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 96.
C READY indicator (99) J PURE AUDIO button and indicator (71)
North American model doesn’t have this indicator. Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing
HDMI Power Control is enabled. this button again selects the previous listening
mode.
D ZONE 2 indicator (105)
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when K AUDIO SEL button (70)
Zone 2 is on. Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
multichannel.
E ZONE 3 indicator (105)
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when L Input selector buttons (62)
Zone 3 is on. Select the following input sources: DVD,
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,
F Remote-control sensor (14) TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.
Receives control signals from the remote controller.
G Display
See “Display” on page 11.
H DISPLAY button (69)
Displays various information about the currently
selected input source.

9
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 10 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued

34
t=3
North American model

a p?
h
ic.p
M N OP Q RS TUV W X Y Z

top
PUSH TO OPEN

i ew
TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC

r/v
TUNING
PHONES DIMMER MEMORY MODE SETUP

. f
PRESET

e s
CLEAR

upe
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

-g ro
dde s
n
ma
b c

.co m
Other models
w w
/ / w
ht tp: e T
PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.


M PHONES jack (69) V TUNING MODE button (63)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan- Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening. and FM radio.
N ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (105) W SETUP button
The ZONE 2 button is used when setting Zone 2. Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3. are displayed on the connected TV.
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or X TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER
Zone 3. buttons
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [ ]
O LEVEL button (106)
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or [ ] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRE-
Zone 3. SET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio pre-
sets (see page 67). With the onscreen setup menus,
P TONE button (106) they work as arrow buttons and are used to select
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble). and set items. The ENTER button is also used with
Q HDMI OUT button (47) the onscreen setup menus.
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting. Y RETURN button
R STEREO button (71) Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup
Selects the Stereo listening mode. menu.
S THX button (71) Z SETUP MIC (55)
Selects the THX listening modes. The automatic speaker setup microphone connects
T DIMMER (RT/PTY/TP) button (66, 68) here.
Adjusts the display brightness. a AUX 2 INPUT (39, 79)
On models other than the North American model, Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,
RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using RDS (not S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.
North American model)” on page 65. b Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (82, 106)
U MEMORY button (67) Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance
Used when storing or deleting radio presets. of Zone 2 and Zone 3.

10
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 11 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued

334
c DIGITAL INPUT button (53) e POWER switch (44)
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.
t
American models do not have this switch.
This is the main power switch. Whenp
=
?to OFF, the
d LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (71)
. p h set
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.
p cto On orItStandby.
AV receiver is completely ishutdown.
o
to ON to set the AVtreceiver
must be set

r /v iew
e e s.f
up
s - gro
nd e
Display
mma
w .co
ww 4
1 2/3
tp:/
5 6
ht

7 8 9 0 A B

For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.


1 Speaker/channel indicators (76) AUTO (63): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-
used by the current input source. ual Tuning mode is selected.
– : A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set TUNED (63): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for tion.
speakers that are set to No or None.
FM STEREO (63): Lights up when tuned to a ste-
The following abbreviations indicate which audio reo FM station.
channels are included in the current input signal.
6 SLEEP indicator (69)
– FL: Front left Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.
– C: Center
7 Audyssey indicator (55)
– FR: Front right
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.
– SL: Surround left
– LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects) 8 Headphone indicator (69)
– SR: Surround right Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged
into the PHONES jack.
– SBL: Surround back left
– SB: Surround back 9 Message area
– SBR: Surround back right Displays various information.
2 BTL indicator (45) (TX-SR875 only) 0 Audio input indicators (70)
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
BTL for bridged front speaker operation. audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
3 ZONE 2 indicator (105) A Volume level (62)
Lights up when Powered Zone 2 is being used. Displays the volume level.
4 Listening mode and format indicators (71) B MUTING indicator (68)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
signal format.
5 Tuning indicators (63)
RDS (not North American model) (65):
Lights up when tuned to a radio station that supports
RDS (Radio Data System).

11
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 12 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued

Rear Panel
=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
78
op
North American model only

K TX-SR875 only
v i ewt
12 3 4 5 6 9 J
es
LMN .fr/ O
u p e
-g ro
d e s
n
ma
HDMI AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

.co m
XM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE SIRIUS AM FM75
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

w
IN 3 IN 2
OUT

w
Y

://w
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN

http
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
12V TRIGGER
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
OUT ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2 ZONE 3
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L L
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
IN 3 (CBL/SAT) SWITCHED
R R R 120W 1A MAX.
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH PRE OUT PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

P Q R S T U V WX YZ a b c d e

A REMOTE CONTROL The HDMI inputs are for connecting components


This (Remote Interactive) jack can be con- with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re
nected to the jack on another -capable
assignable, which means you can assign each one to
Onkyo component for remote and system control.
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI
To use , you must make an analog audio connec- Input Setup” on page 48.
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other
The HDMI output is for connecting a TV or projec-
component, even if they are connected digitally.
tor with an HDMI input.
B RS232
G SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital
automation equipment and external controllers.
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
C PHONO IN instructions).
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.
H XM antenna (on North American model)
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3 This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and
These RCA component video inputs are for con- Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM
necting components with a component video output, instructions).
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-
I MONITOR OUT
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
The S-Video or composite video jack should be
means you can assign each one to an input selector
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 50. J AM ANTENNA
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
antenna.
This RCA component video output is for connect-
ing a TV or projector with a component video input. K ZONE 2 OUT (TX-SR875 only)
This composite video output can be connected to a
F HDMI IN 1–4 and OUT
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
The TX-SR805 has HDMI IN 1–3 and OUT.
L FM ANTENNA
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
nections carry digital audio and digital video.

12
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 13 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued

34
M IR IN/OUT W CBL/SAT IN
=3
p?t
A commercially available IR receiver can be con- A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.

ph
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks

ic .
X VCR/DVR IN/OUTtop
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it for connecting the video signal.

iew such as a VCR or DVR, can be


when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
r /v
s.f andherecomposite
A video component,

e
A commercially available IR emitter can be con- connected for recording and playback. There’s
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
up eS-Video video input and output jacks

-g
remote control signals through to other components. ro for connecting the video signal.

d e s
n
N 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 Y DVD IN

mma
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s

.co
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-

ww
turned on on the AV receiver, a 12-volt trigger sig- necting the video signal.

: / / w
nal is output.
ttpINLET
Z FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR
hThe
O AC
supplied power cord is connected here. The
BACK L/R SPEAKERS
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
other end of the power cord should be connected to L/R, center, surround L/R, and surround back L/R
a suitable wall outlet. speakers.
P DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3 The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal
These coaxial digital audio inputs are for connect- posts can be used with front speakers and surround
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output, back speakers respectively, or used to bi-amp or
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign- bridge the front speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front
able, which means you can assign each one to an Speakers” and “Bridging the Front Speakers
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input (TX-SR875 only)” on page 24.
Setup” on page 52. The TX-SR805 does not support bridging.
Q DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT a MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
components with an optical digital audio output, This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign- component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
able, which means you can assign each one to an put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
Setup” on page 52.
b PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can
a CD recorder. be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-
R GND screw channel power amplifier for when you want to use
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-
wire. WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-
S CD IN woofer.
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD c PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3
player’s analog audio output. These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
T TAPE IN/OUT line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
These analog audio input and output jacks are for d ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, Zone 2.
etc. e AC OUTLET (North American and European
U AUX 1 IN models only)
A VCR for playback only or other video source can These switched AC outlets can be used to supply
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite power to other AV components. The type and num-
video input jacks for connecting the video signal. ber of outlets depends on the country in which you
V GAME/TV IN purchased your AV receiver.
A game console or TV output can be connected
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input
jacks for connecting the video signal. See pages 20–43 for hookup information.

13
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 14 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries Using the Remote Controller
t = 334
When using the remote controller, pointpit?
c . p h toward the AV
1 the small hollow and slide open the cover.
To open the battery compartment, press receiver’s remote control
p i
sensor, as shown below.

v i e wto Remote control sensor


e s . fr/
upe
STANDBY indicator
o
AV receiver

-g r
e s
m and
. c om batteries (AA/R6) 30˚

2 Insert
ww with the polarity diagram
the three supplied 30˚

/ / w
: the battery compartment.
in accordance

h t t p
inside Approx. 16 ft.
(5 m)

Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
3 Slide the cover shut.
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-
cle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control
Notes:
sensor.
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.

14
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 15 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller—Continued

About the Remote Controller Modes RECEIVER/TAPE Mode


t = 334
h ?the AV
pOnkyo
. p
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control
controller to control your other AV components. The
recorder connected via to.p
ic
receiver. It can also be used to control an cassette
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use
v i w to RECEIVER/TAPE
econtroller
with each type of component. Modes are selected by
r /
.f the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE
To set the remote
mode, s
e
using the REMOTE MODE buttons. press

up e
button.
■ RECEIVER/TAPE Mode
g r o
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV
d e s-via
n
ma
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected
.

c o m A
■ DVD Mode
w. an Onkyo DVD player in this
ON STANDBY

w
TV
B
/ w
INPUT

/ L
By default, you can control
mode. By:entering
ttpcontrol components made by other manufactur-
the appropriate remote control code, C DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

hcan
1 2 3 +
you GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 -
ers (see page 108). TAPE TUNER CD

■ CD/CDR/MD Mode PHONO


7 8 9
D. TUN TV VOL
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this +10 0 CLEAR

mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code, --/--- 10 11


INPUT SELECTOR
12
M
MACRO
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD D 1 2 3 ZONE3

recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 108). REMOTE MODE


DVD VCR CD ZONE2
■ DOCK Mode RECEIVER CDR/MD

This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo TAPE/AMP


TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER N
SAT TAPE/AMP
RI Dock that’s connected via . DIMMER SLEEP

5 MEN
U MEN O
■ TV and VCR Modes F TO
P U

With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You +


must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see G CH
DISC ENTER VOL P
ALBUM

page 108). -
■ CABLE/SAT Mode
H PREV SE
GU
ID E E XI
T
Q
TUP RN
CH RETU
In CABLE/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satel- I DISPLAY MUTING
R
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote
control code first (see page 108). 1
■ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see


page 105). LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR

J REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

1 Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select


a mode. K TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF


AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ S
2 Use the buttons supported by that mode
to control the component.
VCR DVD HDD
T
RC-690M
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see page 15 U
DVD mode: see page 17
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 18
DOCK mode: see page 19
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 110

Note:
Some of the remote controller functions described in this
manual may not work as expected with other compo-
nents.

15
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 16 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller—Continued

34
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses. T L NIGHT button (81)
=3
p?t
Turns the Late Night function on or off.
A STANDBY button (44) U AUDIO SEL button (70)
ic . ph
op
Sets the AV receiver to Standby. Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or
B ON button (44)
i ewt
multichannel.
v
Turns on the AV receiver.
es .fr/
C INPUT SELECTOR buttons (62)
p e
Used to select the input source.
-g rou ■ TAPE mode
D MACRO buttons (112)
d e s On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
n
ma
Used with the Macro function. 1 Previous and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons
E DIMMER button (68)
.co m The Previous [ ] button selects the previous

ww
Adjusts the display brightness. track. During playback it selects the beginning of

/ / w the current track. The Next [ ] button selects the

tp: to select and adjust settings.


F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
htUsed
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
G CH +/– button (67) and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-
Selects radio presets. erly with some cassette tapes.
H SETUP button Play [ ] button
Used to change settings. Starts playback.
I DISPLAY button (69) Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons
Displays information about the current input source. The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast
J LISTENING MODE buttons (71) Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.
Used to select the listening modes. The [STEREO], Reverse Play [ ] button
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] but- Starts reverse playback.
tons can be used at any time, regardless of the cur- Stop [ ] button
rently selected remote controller mode. Stops playback.
K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+ REC [ ] button
buttons (68, 90) Starts recording.
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.
L LIGHT button
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on
or off.
M D.TUN button (64)
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.
N REMOTE MODE buttons (15)
Used to select the remote controller modes. When
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for
the currently selected mode lights up.
O SLEEP button (69)
Used with the Sleep function.
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (62)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.
Q RETURN button
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
R MUTING button (68)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
S Re-EQ button (81)
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.

16
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 17 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller—Continued

DVD Mode A STANDBY button


=3 34
p?t
Sets the DVD player to Standby.

. ph
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the B ON button
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.
op ic
wt
Turns on the DVD player.

v i e
C Number buttons
/ title, chapter, and track numbers, and
s .frtimes
Used to
e
enter

upe
to enter for locating specific points.

s - gro D TOP MENU button


e
and
Selects a DVD’s top menu.
A
mm E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons

c o
ON STANDBY

.
B
TV Used to navigate menus and select items.
w
INPUT

ww
F DISC +/– button
/ /
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

C
tp : 1 2 3 +
Selects discs on a DVD changer.
ht
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 - G SETUP button
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
PHONO
+10 0
D. TUN
CLEAR
TV VOL
H DISPLAY button
--/--- 10 11
INPUT SELECTOR
12
M Displays information about the current disc, title,
MACRO chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
1 2 3 ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
time, total time, and so on.
DVD VCR CD
CDR/MD
ZONE2
I Playback buttons
DVD
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
D SAT TAPE/AMP
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow
DIMMER SLEEP N
ENU MEN
Forward.
E TO
PM U

J REPEAT button
+
Used with the repeat playback function.
F CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

-
K AUDIO button
G PREV SE
GU
ID E E XI
T
O Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
TUP RN

H
CH RETU mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
DISPLAY MUTING
L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button
I Opens and closes the disc tray.

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM


M CLEAR button
P Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
LISTENING MODE N MENU button
STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


Displays a DVD’s menu.
J PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST Q O RETURN button
K TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+
R Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.

L
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ
P RANDOM button
VCR DVD HDD
S Used with the random playback function.
RC-690M Q PLAY MODE button
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
R SUBTITLE button
Selects subtitles.
S VIDEO OFF button
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating
any possibility of interference.

17
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 18 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller—Continued

CD/MD/CDR Modes A STANDBY button


=3 34
p?t
Sets the component to Standby.

. ph
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD B ON button
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by
op ic
wt
Set the component to On or Standby.
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE
v i
C Number buttonse
. r/points.
MODE button to select the CD/MD/CDR remote con-
Usedfto
troller mode.
e s enter track numbers and times for locating
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD
u pe specific

- gro
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer, D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons
e s
and
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code Used with some components.
(see page 108).

mm E DISC +/– button

. c o Selects discs on a CD changer.


w
ww
F DISPLAY button
: / /
http
Displays information about the current disc or track,
A including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
ON STANDBY
TV and so on.
B INPUT

DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT G Playback buttons


1 2 3 + From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,
C GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 - Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.


TAPE

7
TUNER

8
CD

9
H REC [ ] button
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL Starts recording.
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12
K I REPEAT button
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO Used with the repeat playback function.
1 2 3 ZONE3

REMOTE MODE CD J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button


DVD VCR CD
CDR/MD
ZONE2
CDR/MD Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER K CLEAR button
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.

D TO
PM
ENU MEN
U L RETURN button
+ Used with some components.
E
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL M RANDOM button
- GU
Used with the random playback function.
T
ID E E XI
PREV SE
TUP RN N PLAY MODE button
F CH RETU

DISPLAY MUTING L Selects play modes on components with selectable


play modes.
7
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

8 M
LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

9 PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST N


TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

J AUDIO SEL
VCR
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD

RC-690M

18
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 19 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Remote Controller—Continued

DOCK Mode A STANDBY button


=3 34
p?t
Turns off the iPod.

. ph
Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo B ON button*
RI Dock that’s connected via .
op ic
wt
Turns on the iPod.

i e
When Using an RI Dock:
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV v
C TOP MENU button
. r/a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
Worksfas
IN L/R jacks.
e s
upe
RI Dock.

ro
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD.

-g
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
d e s Used to navigate menus and select items.
page 51).
n
m
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more
ma E ALBUM +/– button*

.co
information. Selects the next or previous album.
w
ww
F DISPLAY button*
: / /
tp
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
ht G Previous [ ] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
A previous song.
ON STANDBY
TV
B INPUT
H Pause [ ] button
DVD

1
VCR/DVR

2
CBL/SAT

3 +
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH works as a Play/Pause button.)
4 5 6 -
TAPE TUNER CD
I Rewind [ ] button
7 8 9 Press and hold to rewind.
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR J PLAYLIST [ ]/[ ] buttons*


--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR Used to select the previous or next playlist on the
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3
iPod.
REMOTE MODE
K REPEAT button*
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD
DOCK Used with the repeat function.
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
L MENU button*
C DIMMER SLEEP
Used to access menus.
U MEN
MEN
4 TO
P U
L M Play [ ] button
+ Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
CH
ENTER VOL on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this
5
DISC
ALBUM

- GU
button works as a Play/Pause button.)
T
ID E E XI
PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RETU
RN N Next [ ] button
6 DISPLAY MUTING
M Selects the next song.
7 N O Stop [ ] button
8 O Stops playback and displays a menu.
9 P
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
P Fast Forward [ ] button
Q Press and hold to fast forward.
J LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR Q RANDOM button*
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
Used with the shuffle function.
K PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST R
R PLAY MODE button
TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF


Used to select play modes on components with
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ selectable play modes.
VCR DVD HDD
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RC-690M RI Dock.

*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported


by 3rd generation iPods.

19
Connecting Your Speakers
Enjoying Home Theater
t = 334
p
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement
h p? in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby .
pic DSP listening modes.
Digital or DTS.
t o
iew
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original

/
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
r v
e e s.f
is p
Front left and right speakers Surround left and right speakers
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theateru
r o to provide a solid These speakers are used for precise
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned
about ear level, and equally spaced from thee
-g
TV.sAngle them inward slightly so
facing the listener at sound positioning and to add realistic

a n d ambience.

m
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex. Position them at the sides of the lis-

. c om tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet

w w (60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally

: / / w they should be equally spaced from the

t t p
hThis speaker enhances the front left
Center speaker
listener.

and right speakers, making sound


movements distinct and providing a
full sound image. For movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV (preferably
on top) facing forward at about ear
level, or at the same height as the
front left and right speakers.

Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.
The volume and quality of the bass output
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi- Surround back left and right speakers
tion, the shape of your listening room, and These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
your listening position. In general, a good bass EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
sound can be obtained by installing the sub- EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-
along the front wall, as shown. tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet
(60–100 cm) above ear level.
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-
woofer, while playing a movie or some music
with good bass, experiment by placing your
subwoofer at various positions within the
room and choose the
one that provides
the most satisfying
results.

Corner
position

1/3 of wall
position

20
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 21 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued

Connecting Your Speakers Connecting a Powered Subwoofer


=3 34
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUB-
ph p?t
.
Speaker Configuration WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-
op ic
wt
For the best surround-sound experience, you should con- woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re

v i e
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER

.fr/
nect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.

s
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.

ee
The following table shows which channels you should
use based on the number of speakers you have.
o u p
s - g7 r
e ✓
Number of speakers: 2 3 4 5 6
✓ n✓d ✓
HDMI

Powered
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

a
ANTENNA
AM FM75

subwoofer
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE

✓ ✓
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

✓ m✓
Front left
OUT

Y
MONITOR

✓ m
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2

o
CONTROL V OUT
12V TRIGGER
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
OUT ZONE 2

c
✓ ✓ ✓
COAXIAL

.
Front right
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT

w
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

wleftw
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R

Center OPTICAL

/
PHONO SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER
CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH PRE OUT PR

/
LINE INPUT
IN 1

:
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R SU
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L

tp right
IN 2
(CD)

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
htSurround
Surround OUT

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
LINE INPUT
Surround back* ✓
Surround back left ✓
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT

Surround back right ✓


* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SURR BACK L terminals.
Attaching the Speaker Labels
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass. The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you
speaker terminals are all black.)
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-
cally (see page 55) or manually (see page 86). Speaker terminal Color
Front left, Zone 2 left White
Using Dipole Speakers Front right, Zone 2 right Red
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and Center Green
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole Surround left Blue
speakers output the same sound in two directions. Surround right Gray
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to Surround back left Brown
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left Surround back right Tan
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned should attach them to the positive (+) side of each
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown. speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All you
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the
Dipole speakers Normal speakers corresponding speaker terminal.
TV/screen 1 TV/screen 1
2 3 4 2 3 4

5 6 5 6

7 8 7 8

1. Subwoofer 6. Surround right speaker


2. Front left speaker 7. Surround back left
3. Center speaker speaker
4. Front right speaker 8. Surround back right
5. Surround left speaker speaker

21
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 22 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued

Speaker Connection Precautions


=3 34
Read the following before connecting your speakers:
ph p?t
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may

ic .
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
op
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of

wt
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the • Be careful not to short the

v i e
.fr/
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6, positive and negative wires.

s
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see Doing so may damage the AV
page 45). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,
u p ee receiver.
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long
-g r o • Don’t connect more than one
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may
d e s cable to each speaker termi-
n
ma
be activated. nal. Doing so may damage the
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
.co m AV receiver.

w
making any connections. • Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.

/ / ww
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
:
ht tp
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.

Connecting the Speaker Cables

1 Strip about 5/8" (15


mm) of insulation from
5/8" (15 mm) 3 Fully insert the bare wire.

the ends of the


speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
4 Screw the terminal tight.

2 Unscrew the terminal.

The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.
Front right speaker Center speaker Front left speaker

HDMI AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

Y
MONITOR AC OUTLET
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR

REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2


IN
SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
DIGITAL
CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE
V OUT
12V TRIGGER
OUT ZONE 2
Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2 ZONE 3
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT) AC 220-240V 50/60Hz


R R R SWITCHED
100W 0.45-0.41A MAX.
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH PRE OUT PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

Surround back Surround right Surround left Surround back


right speaker speaker speaker left speaker

22
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 23 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued

Bi-amping the Front Speakers Bi-amping Speaker Hookup


=334
ph p?t
.
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts
can be used with front speakers and surround back 1 Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
op ic
wt
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter

v i e
.fr/
tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that (high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble
ee s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
performance.
o u p speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.

-g r
s
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
e 2 Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
n d
ma
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
m
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV

.co
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to
w
ww
SURR BACK L/R terminal posts connect to the front the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
: / /
speakers’ woofer terminals.
tp
minal.

ht
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must 3 Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
set the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi- terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter
amping (see page 45). (high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
Important: FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals. 4 Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8 ohms the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-
or higher for bi-amping. Failure to do so may seriously minal.
damage the AV receiver.

HDMI AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

XM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE SIRIUS AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT IR
IN
REMOTE CB/PB
CONTROL V V
12V TRIGGER
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
OUT ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S S
CR/PR
OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2 ZONE 3
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L L
AC OUTLET
IN 3 (CBL/SAT) AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
R R R 120W 1A MAX.
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH PRE OUT PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

SURR BACK R SURR BACK L


Bi-AMP FRONT R FRONT L Bi-AMP

Woofer (low)
Tweeter (high)

Right speaker Left speaker

23
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 24 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Speakers—Continued

Bridging the Front Speakers Bridged Speaker Hookup


=3 34
(TX-SR875 only)
ph p?t
ic .
op
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts 1 Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)

wt
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
i e
can be used with front speakers and surround back
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide
.fr/v
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
almost double the output power for the front speakers.
ee s BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right

o u p speaker’s negative terminal.

r
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re
e s -g 2 Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
using a powered subwoofer).
n d
ma
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
m
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L

.co
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative
w
ww
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are terminal.
not.
: / /
ht tp
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the Speaker Type setting to BTL to enable bridging
(see page 45).
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.

HDMI AC INLET
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

XM
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE SIRIUS AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
12V TRIGGER
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
OUT ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2 ZONE 3
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L L
AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
IN 3 (CBL/SAT) SWITCHED
R R R 120W 1A MAX.
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH PRE OUT PRE OUT
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP ZONE2 L
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

SURR BACK R SURR BACK L


Bi-AMP FRONT R FRONT L Bi-AMP

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

Right speaker Left speaker

24
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 25 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Antennas

34
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied

=3
p?t
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-

ph
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas. door FM antenna instead (see page 26).

ic .
op
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without

wt
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna

v i e
.fr/ the AM Loop Antenna
to use the tuner.

s
Connecting
AM antenna push terminals
e
e supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
ouponly.
The

-gr
ANTENNA

d e s
n
AM FM75

mma 1 Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting

.co
the tabs into the base, as shown.
w
: / / ww
ht tp FM antenna jack

Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna


The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
2 Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM push terminals, as
shown.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
1 Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
they can be connected either way around).
■ American Model
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
FM75
wires, not the insulation.
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.

■ Other Models

FM75
Push Insert wire Release

Insert the plug fully


into the jack.

Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll


need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
possible reception.
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
2 Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position. Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.

If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied


Thumbtacks, etc. indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 26).

Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself


when using thumbtacks.

25
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 26 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Antennas—Continued

Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna


t = 334
p h p?canthebesupplied
.
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied If good reception cannot be achieved using
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
p i
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AMc antenna used in
door FM antenna instead.
e to
wOutdoor
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.

r/ v i
. f
antenna
s
FM 75

upee Insulated antenna cable

gro
AM loop antenna

e s -
nd
mma
Notes:
w .co
: / / ww
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable

ht tp
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizon-
attic or loft. tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter. Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.

TV/FM antenna splitter

To AV receiver To TV (or VCR)

26
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 27 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components


About AV Connections AV Connection Color Coding
=3 34
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
ph p?t
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,

ic .
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-

op
supplied with your other AV components.

wt
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
i e
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and
v
.fr/
and double-checked all AV connections. outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
Optical Digital Jacks
p e es connect composite video inputs and outputs.

The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-typerou Left (white)


g
Analog audio
-
Left (white)
covers that open when an optical plug is insertedsand
n d e Right (red) Right (red)

m a
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
m
Composite video

.codamage, hold the optical


(Yellow) (Yellow)

Caution: To preventw
w
plug straight/whenw shutter • Push plugs in all the way to make
:/
Right!

p
inserting and removing.
t
good connections (loose connec-
h t tions can cause noise or malfunc-
tions).
• To prevent interference, keep Wrong!
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.

AV Cables and Jacks


Video
Cable Jack Description

HDMI
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
HDMI dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
Y Y Y Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
Component PB PB CB/PB
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
video cable picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their
PR PR
CR/PR component video jacks slightly differently.)
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals
S-Video cable S and provides better picture quality than composite
video.
Composite V
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
video cable and other video equipment.

Audio

OPTICAL
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
Optical digital
audio cable
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for coaxial.

COAXIAL
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to
Coaxial digital
audio cable
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is
the same as for optical.
L This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
common connection format for analog audio and
R
can be found on virtually all AV components.
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
Multichannel channel analog audio output. Several standard
analog audio
cable (RCA)
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
channel cable.

Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.


27
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 28 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver


t = 334
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to thep ?receiver, you
hAVAVreceiver.
p
on.the
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source c

w t opi
: Signal Flow
r e
/viVideo
Video
es . f
u p e
Audio
g r o Audio

d e s-
n
TV, projector,

m a etc.

. co m
w
/ / ww
DVD player, etc.
:
http
Speakers (see page 22 for hookup details)

Which Connections Should I Use?


The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.

Video Connection Formats


Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the
Immediate Display preference to Off (page 97).

■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Yes


With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Yes (see Video Signal Flow Chart
page 46), video input signals flow through the
AV receiver as shown, with composite video, DVD player, etc.
S-Video, and component video sources all
being upconverted for the HDMI output. Use
this setting if you connect the AV receiver’s Composite S-Video Component HDMI
HDMI OUT to your TV.
IN
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective AV receiver
input signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
Composite S-Video Component HDMI

TV, projector, etc.

28
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 29 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

■ HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No


=3 34
p?t
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see Video Signal Flow Chart

ph
page 46), video input signals flow through the
DVD player, etc.
ic .
op
AV receiver as shown, with composite video

wt
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the

v i e
.fr/
component video output. Use this setting if you

es
connect the AV receiver’s COMPONENT
e
Composite S-Video Component HDMI
VIDEO OUT to your TV.
u p
gAVroreceiver
IN

-
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video
and S-Video is downconverted to composite
de s
n
ma
video. Note that these conversions only apply

.co m
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not MONITOR OUT

w
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs. Composite S-Video Component

//ww
HDMI

:
The composite video, S-Video, and component

http
video pass through their respective input sig-
nals as they are.
On the TX-SR875, this signal flow also applies TV, projector, etc.
when the Monitor Out Resolution setting is set
to Through (see page 46).

Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting Video Signal Flow Chart
On the TX-SR875, when the HDMI Monitor
setting is set to No (see page 46), if the Monitor DVD player, etc.
Out Resolution setting is set to anything other
than Through (see page 46), the video signal
flow will be as shown here, with composite Composite S-Video Component HDMI
video and S-Video sources being upconverted
IN
for the component video output.
The composite video, S-Video, and component AV receiver
video outputs pass through their respective
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input MONITOR OUT
signals are not output. Composite S-Video Component

TV, projector, etc.

Audio Connection Formats


Audio equipment can be connected to the AV Audio Signal Flow Chart
receiver by using any of the following audio
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial, DVD player, etc.
analog multichannel, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig- HDMI Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel
ital input signals for analog line outputs and
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-
AV receiver
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.
HDMI Optical Analog

MD recorder, etc. * 1 Depends on the HDMI Audio setting (see page 99).
* 2 Only the front L/R channels are output.

29
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 30 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a TV or Projector
=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
s .fr/
Step 2: Audio Connection
u p ee
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
-g r o
d e s
n
ma
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

.co m
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
w
ww
a and b , or a and c .)

: / /
ht tp
Connection
A
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
Signal flow

TV
Component video input
Picture quality
Best
B MONITOR OUT S ⇒ S-Video input Better
C MONITOR OUT V ⇒ Composite video input Standard
a GAME/TV IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
C
IN
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
b S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L
IN

L
IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
B
c IN 3 (CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL
R R

a
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH

(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL Y PB PR AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


OUT OUT COMPONENT VIDEO IN OUT IN IN

Connect one
or the other TV, projector,
etc.

If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite
Hint! receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see
pages 33 and 35).

30
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 31 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a DVD player


=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
.fr/
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.

ee s
o u p
r
Step 2: Audio Connection

e s -g
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.

n d
mma
.co
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

w
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use

/ / ww
a and b , or a and c .)
:
ht tp
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection a .

Connection AV receiver Signal flow DVD player Picture quality


A COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 ⇐ Component video output Best
B DVD IN S ⇐ S-Video output Better
C DVD IN V ⇐ Composite video output Standard
a DVD IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 ⇐ Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN C
REMOTE CB/PB V ZONE 2
b DIGITAL
CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
OUT

IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
B
L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)

c OPTICAL
R R

PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD TAPE

SURR BACK R
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
a
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER
IN 2

A (CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL Y PB PR AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


OUT OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT OUT OUT

Connect one
or the other DVD player

To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a


multichannel analog audio output, see page 32.

31
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 32 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Hooking Up the Multichannel Input


=3 34
ph
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel
p?t
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
ic .
p MULTI CH FRONT
w toreceiver’s
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV
L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to thei7.1-channel e
. f r /v connect anything
analog audio output on your

e s
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t to the AV receiver’s

pe
Before using the multichannel input, you must assignritotouan input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 54. To
SURR BACK L/R jacks.

select the multichannel input, see “Selectinge s -gInputs” on page 70. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the
ndSensitivity” on page 99.
Audio
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer a
m
Input

. c om
/ / w ww
:
HDMI

http
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

7.1 ch
OUT

Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN
CB/PB

5.1 ch
REMOTE ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L
FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
L L
PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L
IN 2
(CD)
R R
SUBWOOFER
OUT MULTI CH

FRONT R (BTL)

L R L R L R

FRONT CENTER SUB SURROUND SURR


WOOFER BACK

DVD player

32
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 33 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback


=3 34
ph p?t
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs
ic .
op
Hint!

wt
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

v i e
s .fr/
u p ee
o
Step 1: Video Connection

-g r
s
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection. If you use

n d e
connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.

mma
Step 2: Audio Connection
w .co
ww
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
: / /
tp
h• tWith connection a , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a and
b , or a and c .)

Connection AV receiver Signal flow VCR or DVR Picture quality


A COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 ⇐ Component video output Best
B VCR/DVR IN S ⇐ S-Video output Better
C VCR/DVR IN V ⇐ Composite video output Standard
a VCR/DVR IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 ⇐ Digital optical output

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN
C
REMOTE CB/PB V ZONE 2
CONTROL OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR

b S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
B
L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
SUBWOOFER
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
PHONO CD TAPE

SURR BACK R
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
a
c IN 2
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER

(CD)

OUT

A FRONT R (BTL)

L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL Y PB PR AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


OUT OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT OUT OUT

Connect one
or the other

VCR or DVR

33
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 34 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording


=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( A or B ), and then make the connection. The video
v i ewt
.fr/
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.

ee s
o u p
r
Step 2: Audio Connection

s -g
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( a or b ), and then make the connection.
e
an d
m m
Connection
.co AV receiver Signal flow VCR or DVD recorder Picture quality

/w ww VCR/DVR OUT S ⇒ S-Video input Better

tp:/B
A

ht
VCR/DVR OUT V ⇒ Composite video input Standard
a VCR/DVR OUT L/R ⇒ Audio L/R input
b DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT ⇒ Digital optical input

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN
B
REMOTE CB/PB V ZONE 2
CONTROL OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L
IN

L
IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
A
IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD TAPE

SURR BACK R
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
a
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER

b IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L R

OPTICAL AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


IN IN IN IN

VCR or DVR

Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.

34
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 35 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source


=3 34
ph p?t
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
ic .
op
Hint!

wt
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.

v i e
s.fr/
u p ee
o
Step 1: Video Connection

s - gr
Choose a video connection that matches the video source ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.

a ndethe AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.


If you use connection A , you must connect

m m
c o
w. that matches the video source ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection

w w
Choose an audio connection
//
tp:connection
h• tWith a , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
a and b , or a and c .)

Connection AV receiver Signal flow Video source Picture quality


A COMPONENT VIDEO 3 IN ⇐ Component video output Best
B CBL/SAT IN S ⇐ S-Video output Better
C CBL/SAT IN V ⇐ Composite video output Standard
a CBL/SAT IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital optical output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN
C
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
B
b L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER

c IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD TAPE

SURR BACK R
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
a
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

A FRONT R (BTL)

L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL Y PB PR AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


OUT OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT OUT OUT

Connect one
or the other
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.

35
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 36 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting Components with HDMI


=3 34
ph p?t
.
About HDMI

op ic
wt
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital

v i e
.fr/
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,

s
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can

p ee
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
u
audio, or multichannel PCM).
-g r o
e s
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface),*1 so TVs and displays
d
n
ma
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and

m
.co (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will
displays, resulting in no picture.)

w
ww
The AV receiver uses HDCP

: / /
display a picture.

http
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a

Supported Audio Formats


• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)
• Bitstream (Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.

About Copyright Protection


The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection),*2 a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT
to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.

*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.

36
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 37 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

334
Making HDMI Connections
t =
? TV,
p h pplayer,
.
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD
projector, and so on.
t o pic
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input f r /v ionew
e s . Setup” page 48.

r o upe
-gare normally output by the HDMI OUT for display on your TV.
■ Video Signals
e s
ndvideo sources can be upconverted for the HDMI output. See “Video Con-
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks

m
Composite video, S-Video, and component
ainformation.
om
nection Formats” on page 28 for more
■ Audio Signals w.c
Digital audio w
/ / w received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
tp : signals

ht99).
receiver.
page
Normally, they are not output by the HDMI OUT, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see

To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio
Hint! Out setting to On (see page 99), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV receiver’s speakers, set the HDMI
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV
receiver's speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.
Note:
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On (see page 99), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV receiver’s
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn
down the AV receiver’s volume.

HDMI HDMI
OUT IN

TV
DVD player

HDMI HDMI

IN 1

HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH

(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

37
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 38 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a Game Console


=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console ( A , B , or C ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
.fr/
If you use connection A , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.

ee s
o u p
r
Step 2: Audio Connection

e s -g
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.

n d
mma
.co
• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.

w
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection b . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use a

/ /
and b .)
: ww
t tp
hConnection AV receiver Signal flow Game console Picture quality
A COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 ⇐ Component video output Best
B GAME/TV IN S ⇐ S-Video output Better
C GAME/TV IN V ⇐ Composite video output Standard
a GAME/TV IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 ⇐ Digital coaxial output

RS232

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN
C
REMOTE CB/PB V ZONE 2
CONTROL OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR
S OUT

IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR
B
L L

IN 3
b
(CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
GND
CD TAPE

SURR BACK R
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
a
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER
IN 2
(CD)

OUT

A FRONT R (BTL)

L R

OPTICAL Y PB PR AUDIO S VIDEO VIDEO


OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUT OUT OUT

Game Console

38
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 39 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component


=334
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( A or B ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
s .fr/
ee
Step 2: Audio Connection

o u p
r
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( a or b ), and then make the connection.

e s -g
n d
mma
.co
MASTER VOLUME

w
: / / ww
ht tp INPUT b
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN DIGITAL


TUNING
LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
DIMMER MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR

DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL


ENTER
TUNING

a
INPUT L AUDIO R
INPUT

VIDEO
S VIDEO INPUT

A B

S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL


OUT OUT OUT OUT

Camcorder, etc.

Connection AV receiver Signal flow Camcorder


A AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO ⇐ S-Video output
B AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO ⇐ Composite video output
a AUX 2 INPUT L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL ⇐ Digital optical output

39
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 40 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a CD Player
=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player ( a , b , or c ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
s .fr/
u p ee
r o
HDMI

s-g
ASSIGNABLE

a
RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

e
ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75

and
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

b COAXIAL
Y

AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


MONITOR
OUT V IR
IN
IN

m
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
V
IN 2 DIGITAL
CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE
OUT

.com
IN 1
COAXIAL
(DVD) CR/PR S L
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

wc
R

w
IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R

://w
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH
CD
OPTICAL (GAME/TV)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L

http
IN 2
(CD)

IN 2 OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL AUDIO


Connect one or the other OUT OUT OUT
CD player

• With connection a , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection b or c . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
use a and b , or a and c .)

Connection AV receiver Signal flow CD


a CD IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital optical output

Connecting a Turntable
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

ANTENNA
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75

PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn- Y


IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR

table.
IN
REMOTE CB/PB ZONE 2
CONTROL V OUT
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR

Notes:
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the IN 3 (CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL
R

PHONO
R

CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
IN 1

AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con- IN 2


(GAME/TV)

(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L
IN

necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum. OUT


L
FRONT R (BTL)

If this happens, disconnect it.


R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car- PHONO
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the
AUDIO
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV OUTPUT

receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks. L

• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn- R


table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono
equalizer’s manual for details.

40
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 41 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder


=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your recorder ( a , b , c , or d ), and then make the connection.
v i ewt
s .fr/
u p ee a
o
b IN

r
COAXIAL

-g
HDMI

IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
L

s
RS232 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

e
ANTENNA

d
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR

n
IN 3 IN 2
OUT
R

ma
Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT IR
IN
REMOTE
CONTROL
CB/PB
V V TAPE
c
m
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
OPTICAL

.co
IN 1 (DVD) S S
CR/PR
OUT

a
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)

w
IN 2 L L

ww
IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R L

/
OPTICAL

/
PHONO SUBWOOFER
CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH

:
IN 1
(GAME/TV)
SURR BACK R

tp
GND
ZONE2 R FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L

d
Bi-AMP

ht
IN 2
OPTICAL (CD)

OUT

TAPE

Connect one L R L R

COAXIAL OPTICAL OPTICAL AUDIO AUDIO


or the other OUT OUT IN IN OUT Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.

• With connection a , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections a and b , or a and c .
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection d .

Connection AV receiver Signal flow Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder


TAPE IN L/R ⇐ Analog audio L/R output
a TAPE OUT L/R ⇒ Analog audio L/R input
b DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital coaxial output
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 ⇐ Digital optical output
d DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT ⇒ Digital optical input

Connecting a Power Amplifier


If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM
ANTENNA
FM75

use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp


IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

Y
MONITOR
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD OUT V IR
IN

to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the
REMOTE CB/PB V ZONE 2
CONTROL OUT
12V TRIGGER
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
OUT ZONE 2
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR

subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered


S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK ZONE 2 ZONE 3
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L L

subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT IN 3

IN 1
(CBL/SAT)

OPTICAL
R

PHONO
R

CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD


SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT PRE OUT
R

(GAME/TV)

SUBWOOFER jack.
GND SURR BACK R SURR BACK L
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L FRONT L Bi-AMP

IN 2
(CD)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL) FRONT L (BTL)

1. Subwoofer 6. Surround right speaker FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK

2. Front left speaker 7. Surround back left


3. Center speaker speaker
4. Front right speaker 8. Surround back right SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
5. Surround left speaker speaker

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK

Power amplifier SUBWOOFER

41
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 42 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting an RI Dock
t = 334
■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
p h p?
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
.
piINc L/Routput
o
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the Connect your RI Dock’s audio jacks to the
t
iew
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect AV receiver’s GAME/TV jacks.
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV
fr /v
(Onkyo DS-A2
.
hookup shown below.)
s
pee
IN V jack.

u
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)
ro
s-g
IN
HDMI

nde
L ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1

GAME/TV

ma
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
ASSIGNABLE R IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

V RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 I Y

m
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT

GAME/TV

.co
REMOTE CB/PB
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE CONTROL V
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
Y IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR

ww
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SA
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OU
REMOTE CB/PB
CONTROL V IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

//w
DIGITAL
IN
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
IN 1 (DVD) S
CR/PR IN 3 (CBL/SAT)

ttp:
R R

L IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN
IN 1
OPTICAL
PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT
L L (GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R

h
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R
IN 3 (CBL/SAT) IN 2
R R (CD)

R OPTICAL
PHONO CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SA
IN 1 OUT
(GAME/TV)
GND SURR BACK R
ZONE2 R Bi-AMP FRONT R
GAME/TV IN 2
(CD)
FRONT R (BTL)

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock, connect its video


output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN S jack.

Notes:
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an cable (see page 43).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 51).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.

Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American and


European models only)
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be
used to connect the power cords of other components that you AC INLET

intend to use with the AV receiver. These components can


then be left turned on so that they turn on and off as and when
the AV receiver is set to On or Standby. AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
120W 1A MAX.

Caution:
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that
you connect to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the AC OUTLET

stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).


Notes:
• Onkyo components connected via should be con-
nected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AC OUTLET
AC 120V 60Hz
SWITCHED
AV receiver. AC 220-240V
SWITCHED
50/60Hz 120W 1A MAX.
100W 0.45-0.41A MAX.
• The number of AC OUTLETS, socket type, and total
capacity depends on the country in which you purchased European model American model
the AV receiver.

42
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 43 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Connecting Your Components—Continued

Connecting Onkyo Components


=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
op
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).
Step 2: Make the necessary connections (see illustration below).
v i ewt
s .fr/
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 51).

u p ee
With
ro
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:
-g
d e s
Auto Power On/Standby
n
mma
When you start playback on a component connected via , if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn

.co
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components
w
ww
connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC

: / /
OUTLET on the AV receiver.

ht tp
Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected via , the AV receiver automatically selects that component as
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the
[AUDIO SEL] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 70), as the Direct Change func-
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.

Remote Control
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other -capable Onkyo components. You must enter
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 109). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver
and not the other component.

Notes:
IN
• Use only cables for connections. cables L

are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.). R

• Some components have two jacks. You can con-


HDMI
ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

ANTENNA
CD
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE AM FM75
IN 3 IN 2 IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT

nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is DIGITAL


REMOTE
CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
Y

CB/PB
V
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD
MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
OUT
IR
IN

IN 1
FRONT
for connecting additional -capable components.
(DVD) CR/PR S
S OUT
IN IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK
IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
L L

IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
L
R R
OPTICAL

• Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Con-


PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH

REMOTE (GAME/TV)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L

CONTROL IN 2
(CD)
R

necting other manufacturer’s components may cause


OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

DVD

a malfunction.
• Some components may not support all functions. e.g., CD player
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
R L
components. ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power


e.g., DVD player
On/Standby and Direct Change functions do not
work. R L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT

Connecting the Power Cord


• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.

43
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 44 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Turning On the AV Receiver

34
• North American model • Other models

=3
p?t
STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON STANDBY

. ph
ON STANDBY
STANDBY indicator STANDBY indicator
c
TV

i
ON INPUT

top
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

w
1 2 3 +

r/v i e
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH
STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON

f
4 5 6

s .
STANDBY
TAPE TUNER CD

e
STANDBY
READY

7 8 9

upe
ZONE 2 ZONE 2

ZONE 3 ZONE 3

PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

ro
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12

s-g
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX INPUT SELECTOR
PHONES PHONES POWER
MACRO

e
1 2 3 ZONE3

and
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE

REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

m
CDR/MD
RECEIVER

.com
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER

POWER SAT TAPE/AMP

w
DIMMER SLEEP

: / / ww
Turning On and Standby
ht tp
1 POWER Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).
(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)
ON OFF
The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.

2 On the AV receiver, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.


Remote
AV receiver controller On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,
STANDBY/ON followed by the [ON] button.
RECEIVER
or The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-
nected via .
ON

To turn the AV receiver off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume
before you turn it off.

For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF
position ( ).

Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps


To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 55.
■ Did you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT?
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 46.
■ Did you connect a component to an HDMI input, Y
HDMI
component video input, or digital audio input?
PB COAXIAL
If you did, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 48, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 50, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 52 respec- PR OPTICAL
tively.
■ Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI OUT IN

Dock?
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 51.
TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock

44
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 45 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup

334
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.

t =
?[ ]/[ ]
Speaker Settings 3
p
Use the Up and Down
h pSpeaker
p ic .
buttons to select “1. Set-
to Settings menu appears.
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

wSpeaker
tings,” and then press [ENTER].
e
If you change these 4settings,
5 6
you-must run the auto-
v i
ENTER

.fr/
TAPE TUNER CD

matic speaker setup 7again8


(see
9
page 55). The
s
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

ee
+10 0 CLEAR

p
--/--- 10 11 12 2-1.Speaker Settings

u
INPUT SELECTOR

-gro
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3
Speaker Impedance 6ohms
Speakers Type Normal

s
REMOTE MODE

nd1 e
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD ENTER
TV CABLE

m a DOCK RECEIVER

m
SAT TAPE/AMP

o
DIMMER SLEEP

. c
U MEN

2, 3 MEN
2–5
w
P U
TO

w
+

://w
CH

p6
ENTER VOL

htt1,
DISC

4
ALBUM

- GU
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
T
ID E E XI
PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN buttons to select “Speaker
DISPLAY MUTING Impedance,” and use the Left and
ENTER
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but less than 6.
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all
If you’ve connected your front speakers to the FRONT speakers are between 6 and
and SURR BACK terminal posts for bi-amping or 16 ohms.
bridging (TX-SR875 only), you must change the
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see “Bi-
amping the Front Speakers” on page 23, or “Bridging the
5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Speaker Type,”
Front Speakers (TX-SR875 only)” on page 24. and use the Left and Right
ENTER
Notes: [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room. nected your front speakers
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to normally.
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room. Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve con-
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol- nected your front speakers for
ume. bi-amped operation.
BTL: (TX-SR875 only) Select this
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
if you’ve connected your
RECEIVER front speakers for bridged
The main menu appears onscreen. operation. The BTL indicator
will appear on the display.
SE
TUP
6 Press the [SETUP] button.
SE Setup closes.
TUP

2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “2. Speaker
Notes:
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
• The design of the TX-SR805 and TX-SR875 onscreen
setup menus is slightly different. The TX-SR805
ENTER
onscreen setup menus are used throughout this
instruction manual.

45
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 46 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

HDMI Monitor Setup


=334
p?t
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “1. Input/Output

ic .
Assign,” and then press

wt op
ENTER
[ENTER].

v i e
.fr/
ON STANDBY
TV
The Input/Output Assign menu

s
appears.
ee
INPUT

p
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

u
1 2 3 +

gro
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

-
4 5 6 -

s
ENTER

e
TAPE TUNER CD

nd
7 8 9

ma
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR

m
--/--- 10 11 12

.co
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

w
1 2 3 ZONE3

w 3
REMOTE MODE

://w
DVD VCR CD ZONE2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

http2, 3
CDR/MD

buttons to select “1. Monitor


DIMMER
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1 Out,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
TO
P MEN
U MEN
U
2–5 The Monitor Out menu appears.
+
CH
DISC ENTER VOL 1-1.Monitor Out
ALBUM

- HDMI Monitor Yes


GU
ID E E XI
T
Resolution Through
1, 6 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING ENTER

(*)

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM


Note:
• The Resolution Through (*) setting
LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR is not available on the TX-SR805.
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO


4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “HDMI Monitor,”
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the and use the Left and Right
ENTER
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output No: Select this if your TV is con-
by the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. nected to the COMPONENT
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT, set the HDMI VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
Monitor setting to Yes so that the onscreen setup menus MONITOR OUT, or V MON-
are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and com- ITOR OUT.
ENTER
ponent video sources are upconverted and output by the Yes: Select this if your TV is con-
HDMI OUT. nected to the HDMI OUT.
On the TX-SR875, you can specify the output resolution Note:
for the HDMI OUT and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT • When Yes is selected, the onscreen
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolu- setup menus are output by only the
tion as necessary to match the resolution supported by HDMI OUT. If you’re not using the
your TV. HDMI OUT and select Yes by mis-
take and the menus disappear, press
the AV receiver’s [HDMI OUT] but-
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
ton so that “HDMI Monitor: No”
RECEIVER appears on the display.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If you have the TX-SR805, press
SE the [SETUP] button to close
TUP
setup.

If you have the TX-SR875, con-


tinue with the next step.

46
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 47 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Using the HDMI OUT Button


=3 34
p?t
5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “Resolution,” The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No or Yes
and use the Left and Right by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV receiver.
ic .
t op
ENTER

w
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:

v i e
.fr/
Through:Select this to pass video
1, 2
through the AV receiver at the
ee s
same resolution and with no
o u p
r
MASTER VOLUME

-g
conversion.
s
STANDBY/ON

e
Auto: Select this to have the AV
d
STANDBY

n
READY

ma
ENTER ZONE 2

receiver automatically con-


ZONE 3

m
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

vert video at resolutions not


.co
PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

ww
supported by your TV. ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE
CLEAR
PRESET

TUNING
ENTER S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL

//w
480p: Select this for 480p output
:
http
and video conversion as nec-
essary. (Not available when
the HDMI Monitor setting is
set to No.)
720p: Select this for 720p output 1 Press the [HDMI OUT] button.
HDMI OUT The current setting is displayed.
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output
and video conversion as nec-
essary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output 2 Press the [HDMI OUT] button
repeatedly to select:
HDMI OUT
and video conversion as nec- No: Select this if your TV is con-
essary. (Not available when nected to the COMPONENT
the HDMI Monitor setting is VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S
set to No.) MONITOR OUT, or V MON-
ITOR OUT.
6 Press the [SETUP] button.
Yes: Select this if your TV is con-
SE Setup closes.
TUP nected to the HDMI OUT.
Note:
• When Yes is selected, the onscreen
setup menus are output by only the
Notes: HDMI OUT. If you’re not using the
• See page 29 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni- HDMI OUT and select Yes by mis-
tor and Resolution settings affect the video signal flow take and the menus disappear, press
through the AV receiver. the [HDMI OUT] button to select
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV No.
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

47
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 48 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

HDMI Input Setup 2 =3 34


p?t
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “1. Input/Output
4 5 6

ic .
Assign,” and then press

op
TAPE TUNER CD ENTER

wt
7 8 9 [ENTER].

i e
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

v
The Input/Output Assign menu

.fr/
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12

s
INPUT SELECTOR
appears.

ee
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3

u p
REMOTE MODE

gro
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

-
CDR/MD
ENTER

1
e s
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER

nd2–4
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER

ma
SLEEP

2, 3 U MEN
P MEN U
TO

.co m
ww
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL

3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

1,//5w
-
buttons to select “2. HDMI Input,”
:
GU T
ID E E XI

http
PREV SE
TUP RN
CH RE T U

DISPLAY MUTING
and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The HDMI Input menu appears.

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM


1-2.HDMI Input
DVD ---
LISTENING MODE VCR/DVR ---
STEREO SURR CBL/SAT ---
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE ENTER GAME/TV ---
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST AUX1 ---
AUX2 ---
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector. 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The buttons to select an input selec-
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD, tor, and use the Left and Right
ENTER

VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2, [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:


TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO. IN1: Select if the video component
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an is connected to HDMI IN 1.
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com- IN2: Select if the video component
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are is connected to HDMI IN 2.
upconverted (*) and output by the HDMI OUT. You can ENTER
IN3: Select if the video component
set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -” is connected to HDMI IN 3.
option. IN4: Select if the video component
is connected to HDMI IN 4.
Composite video, S-Video, (TX-SR875 only.)
component video HDMI - - -: Select this to upconvert and
IN output composite video,
( *) S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
OUT.
OUT
Composite video, S-Video, HDMI
component video
5 Press the [SETUP] button.
SE Setup closes.
TUP

1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,


followed by the [SETUP] button.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen. Notes:
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one
input selector.
SE
TUP • For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI OUT, the HDMI Monitor
setting must be set to Yes (see page 46). See page 28
for more information on video signal flow and upcon-
version.

48
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 49 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

34
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
=3
p?t
explained here, the digital audio input for that input

ph
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 52.
ic .
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
wtop
v i e
.fr/
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
ees
o u p
-g r
d e s
n
mma
w .co
: / / ww
ht tp

49
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 50 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Component Video Input Setup


=3 34
p?t
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,

ph
RECEIVER followed by the [SETUP] button.

ic .
The main menu appears onscreen.

wt op
v i e
.fr/
SE

s
TUP

ee
ON STANDBY

p
TV

u
INPUT

ro
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

-g
1 2 3 +

e s
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

d
-

n
4 5 6

2
ma
TAPE

7
TUNER

8
CD

9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

m
TV VOL
buttons to select “1. Input/Output

.co
PHONO D. TUN
+10 0 CLEAR

Assign,” and then press


w
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR

//ww
MACRO ENTER
1 2 3 ZONE3 [ENTER].

:
http
REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2 The Input/Output Assign menu
CDR/MD
appears.
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
1
DIMMER SLEEP

2, 3
U MEN

+
TO
P MEN U
2–4 ENTER

CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

- GU T
ID E E XI

1, 5 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING

3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “3. Component
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
Video Input,” and then press
ENTER

LISTENING MODE
[ENTER].
STEREO

REPEAT
SURR

AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


The Component Video Input menu
appears.
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input 1-3.Component Video Input
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player ENTER DVD IN1
VCR/DVR ---
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM- CBL/SAT ---
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector. GAME/TV ---
AUX1 ---
AUX2 ---
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,
AUX 2, TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO) are assigned to
the “- - -” option. 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an input selec-
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a tor, and use the Left and Right
ENTER
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-
IN1: Select if the video component
verted (*) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
is connected to COMPO-
OUT. You can set this for each input selector by selecting
NENT VIDEO IN 1.
the “- - -” option.
IN2: Select if the video component
Composite video, S-Video Component video is connected to COMPO-
ENTER

IN NENT VIDEO IN 2.
( *) IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 3.
OUT
- - -: Select to output composite
Composite video, S-Video Component video
video and S-Video sources
from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT.

50
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 51 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

5 Press the [SETUP] button. Changing the Input Display


t = 334
Setup closes.
h ?
pTAPE
. p
SE If you connect an -capable Onkyo MiniDisc
ic
TUP

to p
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the IN/OUT

i e w
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for

. f /vonly be changed on the AV receiver.


rcan
to work properly, you must change this setting.
Notes:
ee s
This setting

u p
gforro
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, the HDMI Monitor set-
s - 1, 2 1, 2
more information on video signal flown
a deupconver-
ting must be set to No (see page 46). See page 28

m
and
MASTER VOLUME

o m
STANDBY/ON

sion.

w. c
STANDBY

READY

w
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
ZONE 2

://w
ZONE 3

receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow


p
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

t
PUSH TO OPEN

h t
TUNING

buttons.
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

1 Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]


input selector button so that
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears
TAPE on the display.
or

GAME/TV

2 Press and hold down the [TAPE]


or [GAME/TV] input selector but-
ton (about 3 seconds) to change
TAPE the setting.
or Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
For the TAPE input selector, the setting
GAME/TV
changes in this order:
TAPE → MD → CDR

DOCK

For the GAME/TV input selector, the


setting changes in this order:
GAME/TV ↔ DOCK

Note:
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same
time.

51
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 52 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Digital Input Setup


=3 34
p?t
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “1. Input/Output

ic .
Assign,” and then press

wt op
ENTER
[ENTER].

v i e
.fr/
ON STANDBY
The Input/Output Assign menu

s
TV
appears.
ee
INPUT

p
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

o u
1 2 3 +

gr
AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

-
GAME/TV

s
4 5 6 - ENTER

nde
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9

ma
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10

m
0 CLEAR

.co
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

ww
1 2 3 ZONE3

3
://w
DVD
REMOTE MODE
VCR CD ZONE2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

http
CDR/MD
buttons to select “4. Digital
DIMMER
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1 Input,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER

2, 3
U MEN
The Digital Input menu appears.
+
TO
P MEN U
2–4
CH 1-4.Digital Input
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

-
DVD COAX1
GU
ID E E XI
T VCR/DVR COAX2
1, 5 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

ENTER
CBL/SAT
GAME/TV
COAX3
OPT1
DISPLAY MUTING
AUX1 ---
AUX2 FRONT
TAPE ---
TUNER ---
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM CD ---
PHONO ---
LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR

4
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you buttons to select an input selec-
must assign that input to an input selector. For example, tor, and then use the Left and
ENTER

if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector. COAX1: Select if the component is
These are the default assignments. connected to DIGITAL
COAXIAL IN 1.
Input selector Audio input
COAX2: Select if the component is
DVD COAX1 connected to DIGITAL
ENTER

VCR/DVR COAX2 COAXIAL IN 2.


COAX3: Select if the component is
CBL/SAT COAX3
connected to DIGITAL
GAME/TV OPT1 COAXIAL IN 3.
AUX 1 --- OPT1: Select if the component is
AUX 2 FRONT (Fixed) connected to DIGITAL
OPTICAL IN 1.
TAPE ---
OPT2: Select if the component is
TUNER --- connected to DIGITAL
CD OPT2 OPTICAL IN 2.
PHONO ---
- - -: Select if the component is
connected to an analog
input.
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.

SE
TUP

52
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 53 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button


=3 34
p?t
5 Press the [SETUP] button.

ph
Setup closes. Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by
.
SE

ic
TUP
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.

wt op
v i e
.fr/ 1
ees
Notes:
p
rou
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input MASTER VOLUME

-g
STANDBY/ON

s
selector.
e
STANDBY

d
READY

n
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is ZONE 2

ma
ZONE 3

fixed at the “- - -” option.


m
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

.co
PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC

• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in


TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

ww
PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

“HDMI Video Setup” on page 48, this input assign-

: //w
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And

http
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.
2, 3
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
1 Press the input selector button
for the input selector that you
want to assign.
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TAPE TUNER CD

PHONO

2 Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]


button.
The current assignment is displayed.
DIGITAL INPUT

3 Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-


ton repeatedly to select an
option.
DIGITAL INPUT Available options are the same as for
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on
page 52.

53
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 54 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Analog Input Setup


=3 34
p?t
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “5. Analog

ic .
Input,” and then press [ENTER].

wt op
ENTER
The Analog Input menu appears.

v i e
.fr/
ON STANDBY
TV 1-5.Analog Input

es
INPUT

e
Multich DVD

p
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

u
1 2 3 +

gro
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

-
4 5 6 -

s
ENTER

e
TAPE TUNER CD

nd
7 8 9

ma
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR

m
--/--- 10 11 12

.co
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

w
1 2 3 ZONE3

w
REMOTE MODE

4
://w
DVD VCR CD ZONE2 Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

http2, 3
CDR/MD

buttons to select an input selec-


TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP 1
DIMMER SLEEP tor.
U MEN

+
TO
P MEN U
2–4 ENTER
You can assign the multichannel input
CH
to the following input selectors: DVD,
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

-
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,
GU
ID E E XI
T
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or
1, 5 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

PHONO.
DISPLAY MUTING

5 Press the [SETUP] button.


REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
SE Setup closes.
TUP
LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog


Notes:
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the
edly to select Multich (see page 70).
DVD input selector.
• Once assigned to an input selector, use the [AUDIO
SEL] button to select the multichannel input (see
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
page 70).
RECEIVER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
The main menu appears onscreen.
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
SE
TUP

2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign,” and then press
ENTER
[ENTER].
The Input/Output Assign menu
appears.

ENTER

54
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 55 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Automatic Speaker Setup Using Audyssey MultEQ XT


=3 34
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)
ph p?t
Notes:
ic .
op
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey
wt
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the

i e
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con- Speaker Impedance setting before running the
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances
.fr/v
automatic speaker setup (see page 45).
from the listening position and calculate the optimal
ee s
p
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
speaker settings for you automatically.
ro u automatically when the automatic speaker setup

s -g
Before using this function, connect and position all of
e
starts.
your speakers.
n d
ma
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed

m
while a pair of headphones is connected.

.co
Measurement Positions

w
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-

ww
To create a listening environment in which several matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-
: / /
tp
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously, surement time varies depending on the number of
ht
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight
positions within the listening area.
positions and speakers.
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
■ 1st measurement position during the automatic speaker setup, unless you
This is the center position of your listening area, or want to cancel the setup.
the listening position if there’s only one listener. • Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
■ 2nd–8th measurement positions the automatic speaker setup.
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
The following examples show some typical home theater 1
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

prompted. STANDBY

READY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

TV TV TV
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

2, 9 ON STANDBY
TV
SETUP MIC

INPUT

TV TV TV DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3 +
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 -
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3

REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD
TV TV TV
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP

U MEN
MEN
ENTER TO
P U
,
+
CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

- GU T
ID E E XI
PREV SE
TUP RN
CH RE T U

: Listening area DISPLAY MUTING

: Listening position
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

55
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 56 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
1 Turn on the AV receiver and the 4 The speaker detect results

ph
connected TV. appear.
On the TV, select the input to which the
ic .
op
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

wt
ENTER
AV receiver is connected.
e
-----SP Detect Result-----

v i
.fr/
FL : Yes FR : Yes

2 Place the setup microphone at


s
SL : Yes SR : Yes

ee
SBL : Yes SBR : Yes

p
the 1st measurement position, C : No SW : Yes

o u
SETUP MIC

r
and connect it to the SETUP MIC

s-g
Next
ENTER Retry
jack.
e
and
Cancel

Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

m
“Yes” means that the speaker was

.com
Please place microphone at center detected. “No” means that no speaker

w w was detected.

://w
of listening area at ear height.

If you agree with the results, use

http
Push Enter : Next
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to select Next, and then
Notes: press [ENTER].
• Make sure the microphone is hori- The options are:
zontal. Next: Proceed to the next step.
• If there’s an obstacle between the Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
microphone and any speaker, the Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker
automatic setup will not work cor- setup.
rectly. Set up the room as you would
when enjoying a DVD movie. 5 The following screen appears.
• Positioning the microphone close to Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
where your ears would normally be
will provide the best results. You can Please place microphone at

set the height of the microphone by 2nd Position at ear height.


using a tripod or level table.
Push Enter : Next

3 Press [ENTER].
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
Place the setup microphone at
Do not unplug microphone. the next position (see page 55),
and then press [ENTER].
Please keep quiet.
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
Now Measuring... measurements. This takes a few min-
utes.
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
A test tone is output by each speaker in
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter- Do not unplug microphone.
mines which speakers are connected. Please keep quiet.
This takes a few minutes.
Note: Now Measuring...

• If any extraneous noise is picked up


by the microphone, the automatic
setup may not work correctly, so
keep quiet.
6 When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.

56
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 57 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
7 After the 6th or 7th measurement, the Review SP Distance: Review the

ph
following screen appears. speaker distance settings (see

ic .
“Reviewing the Results” on
op
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

wt
ENTER
page 59).

v i e
Review SP Level: Review the speaker
.fr/
Please select “Next”, when measuring
next position, and select “finish”,

s
level settings (see “Reviewing
ee
when ending.

p
the Results” on page 59).
u
Next
finish(Calculate)

-g ro Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker


s
ENTER

e
setup.
n d
ma
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
10 If you selected “Save,” the results are

.co m
buttons to select an option, and saved, and the following screen
w
then press [ENTER].
ww
appears.

: / / Next: Select this if you want to mea-

ht tp
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
sure another listening posi-
tion. After the 8th
measurement has been taken, Saving...
the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Finish (Calculate): Select this if you
don’t want to measure any
more listening positions and
are ready to calculate the
11 Disconnect the setup micro-
phone.
results, then go to step 8.
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

8 When the measurements are


complete, the following screen
Please unplug microphone.
appears.
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Calculating...

Notes:
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the
Equalizer Settings (page 91) will be set to Audyssey.
• You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any
9 When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the
setup microphone.
appears.
ENTER

Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Save Error Messages


Review SP Config
Review SP Distance During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following
Review SP Level
Cancel error messages may appear:
ENTER
Ambient noise is too high
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select an option, and
then press [ENTER]. Ambient noise is too high.

Save: Save the calculated settings


and exit the automatic Retry
Cancel
speaker setup.
Review SP Config: Review the
speaker configuration settings This message appears if there’s too much background
(see “Reviewing the Results” noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-
on page 59). erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or
cancel the automatic speaker setup.

57
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 58 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Speaker Detect Error


=334
p?t
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

ph
-----Speaker Detect Error-----

c .
-----Speaker Detect Error-----

op i
FL : Error FR : Yes

wt
FL : Yes FR : Yes SL : Yes SR : Yes
SL : Yes SR : Yes SBL : Yes SBR : Yes
SBL : Yes SBR : Yes C

v
:
i eYes SW : Yes

.fr/
C : No SW : Yes

esis a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be


Retry
Retry

e
Cancel

p
Cancel

-gr ou There

s
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
e
broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
n d
ma
too high.
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections

.co m
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup. AUDYSSEY

w
Auto Speaker Setup

: / / ww Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

ht tp-----Speaker Detect Error-----


FL : Yes FR : No
Speaker Detect Error

SL : --- SR : ---
SBL : --- SBR : --- Retry
C : Yes SW : --- Cancel

Retry
Cancel
A different number of speakers has been detected.

One of the front speakers has not been detected. Writing Error
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

-----Speaker Detect Error-----


FL : Yes FR : Yes Writing Error!
SL : --- SR : No
SBL : --- SBR : ---
C : Yes SW : ---
Retry
Retry Cancel
Cancel

This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or


One of the surround speakers has not been detected. cancel the automatic speaker setup.
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY
be malfunctioning and you should contact your Onkyo
-----Speaker Detect Error-----
dealer.
FL : Yes FR : Yes
SL : --- SR : No
SBL : --- SBR : Yes
C : Yes SW : ---

Retry
Cancel

The surround back speakers have been detected but the


surround speakers haven’t.

Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

-----Speaker Detect Error-----


FL : Yes FR : Yes
SL : --- SR : Yes
SBL : No SBR : Yes
C : Yes SW : ---

Retry
Cancel

The right surround back speaker has been detected but


the left surround back speaker hasn’t.

58
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 59 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

Reviewing the Results Changing the Speaker Settings Manually


=3 34
ph p?t
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
ic .
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running
op
buttons to select the settings that
wt
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have

i e
you want to review, and then
v
ENTER
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 86–91).

.fr/
press [ENTER].
Notes:
ee s
p
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup • For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-

ro u
-g
Save over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-
s
Review SP Config

e
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select
d
Review SP Distance

n
ENTER Review SP Level

ma
Cancel 80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see

m
page 86).

.co
ww
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds

/ w
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-

tp: /
ht
The options are: mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-
ally.
Review SP Config
Review the speaker configuration Using a Powered Subwoofer
settings.
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very
AUDYSSEY
Auto Speaker Setup low-frequency sound and its position is usually low
Review SP Config down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker
Subwoofer : Yes
Front : Full Band
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,
Center : 80Hz select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-
Surround : 100Hz
Surr Back : 150Hz ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the
Surr Back Ch : 2ch
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or
Review SP Distance Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
Review the speaker distance set- details.
tings.
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Review SP Distance
Left : 15ft
Center : 15ft
Right : 15ft
Surr Right : 7ft
Surr Back R : 7ft
Surr Back L : 7ft
Surr Left : 7ft
Subwoofer : 15ft

Review SP Level
Review the speaker level settings.
Auto Speaker Setup AUDYSSEY

Review SP Level
Left : +12dB
Center : 0dB
Right : –12dB
Surr Right : +3dB
Surr Back R : +4dB
Surr Back L : -6dB
Surr Left : -3dB
Subwoofer : 0dB

Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-


vious screen.

59
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 60 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

TV Format Setup
=3 34
p?t
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
(not North American models) buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”

ic .
and then press [ENTER].

wt op
ENTER
The OSD Setup menu appears.

v i e
.fr/
6-2.OSD Setup

e es Immidiate Display On
ON STANDBY

p
TV

u
INPUT Monitor Type 4:3

gro
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT Display Position Bottom

-
+ TV Format Auto

s
1 2 3 ENTER

e
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH Language

nd
4 5 6 -

ma
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9 (*)

.co m
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR
Note:
w
--/--- 10 11 12

ww
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
• The Language (*) setting is not
/ /
1 2 3 ZONE3

tp : available on the TX-SR805.


REMOTE MODE

ht
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD

DIMMER
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
SLEEP
1 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “TV Format,”
2, 3 ENU MEN

+
TO
PM U
2–4 and then use the Left and Right
ENTER
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
- GU
ID E E XI
T Auto: Select this to have the AV
1, 5 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN
receiver automatically detect
DISPLAY MUTING

the TV system from the video


input signals.
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
ENTER
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
LISTENING MODE
your area is NTSC.
STEREO

REPEAT
SURR

AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


PAL: Select if the TV system in
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST
your area is PAL.
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
5 Press the [SETUP] button.
1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [SETUP] button.
SE
TUP
Setup closes.
RECEIVER
The main menu appears onscreen.

SE
TUP
Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “6. Miscella-
neous,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Miscellaneous menu appears.

ENTER

60
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 61 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

First Time Setup—Continued

AM Frequency Step Setup


=3 34
p?t
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
(on some models) buttons to select “3. Tuner,” and

ic .
then press [ENTER].

wt op
ENTER
The Tuner menu appears.

v i e
.fr/
7-3.Tuner

e es AM Freq Step 9kHz


ON STANDBY

p
TV

u
INPUT

gro
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

-
+

s
1 2 3 ENTER

e
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

nd
4 5 6 -

ma
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9

.co m
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR

w
--/--- 10 11 12

w
INPUT SELECTOR

://w
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

http
REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2 buttons to select “AM Freq.
CDR/MD
Step,” and then use the Left and
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP 1 ENTER
DIMMER SLEEP Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
2, 3
U MEN

+
TO
P MEN U
2–4 10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
CH
used in your area.
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

-
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
GU
ID E E XI
T
in your area.
1, 5 PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING
ENTER

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

5 Press the [SETUP] button.


For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the SE Setup closes.
TUP
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.

1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,


followed by the [SETUP] button.
Note:
RECEIVER
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
The main menu appears onscreen.
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
SE
TUP

2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

ENTER

61
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 62 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Playing Your AV Components


Basic AV Receiver Operation
=3 34
ph p?t
ic .
wt op
v i e
.fr/
ON STANDBY
TV

ees
INPUT

DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

oup
3 1 2 3 +

r
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

-g
4 5 6 -
1
e s
MASTER VOLUME TAPE TUNER CD

d
7 8 9

n
STANDBY/ON

ma
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL
STANDBY
+10 0 CLEAR

m
READY

ZONE 2
--/--- 10 11 12

.co
INPUT SELECTOR
ZONE 3

MACRO

w
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY
1 2 3 ZONE3

w
PUSH TO OPEN

REMOTE MODE

://w
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD

http
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
1
DIMMER SLEEP

U MEN
P MEN U
TO

1 +
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL
3
- GU T
ID E E XI
PREV SE
TUP RN
CH RE T U

DISPLAY MUTING

1 Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.


AV receiver Remote
controller To select an input source with the remote controller, press its
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT RECEIVER
buttons.
GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TAPE TUNER CD DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2
PHONO
4 5 6
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9
PHONO
+10

2 Start playback on the source component.


To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-
nected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, HDMI OUT, or MONITOR
OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output
settings.

3 To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote
controller’s [VOL] button.
AV receiver Remote
controller
MASTER VOLUME Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –∞ dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through
VOL
+18.0 dB.

4 Select a listening mode and enjoy!


See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 71.

62
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 63 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Listening to the Radio


Listening to AM/FM Stations ■ Manual Tuning Mode
= 3 34
t
p? button
1 h
Press the [TUNING MODE]

c . p
TUNING

i
MODE
TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disap-
TUNING
ew top
pears from the display.
i
s.fr/v
MASTER VOLUME

2ee
STANDBY/ON

p
Press and hold the TUNING Up or
u
STANDBY

ro
READY

Down [ ]/[ ] button.


-g
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

e s
TUNING
The frequency stops changing when
d
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

n
ma
TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC

you release the button.


TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF

m
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

Press the button repeatedly to change


.co
TUNING

w
the frequency one step at a time.

w w TUNER

:// tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio


httpand store your favorite stations as presets for
With the built-in The North American model changes FM frequency in
stations 0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models
easy selection. it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected. Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations
TUNER
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
Band Frequency
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.

(Actual display depends on country.)

Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations

■ Auto Tuning Mode

1 TUNING
MODE
Press the [TUNING MODE] button
so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.

2 Press the TUNING Up or Down


[ ]/[ ] button.
TUNING
Searching stops when a station is
found.
TUNING

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator


appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator also appears.
TUNED
AUTO

FM STEREO

63
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 64 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

334
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency Displaying AM/FM Radio Information
t =
p?DISPLAY
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-

. ph
ing the appropriate frequency.

op ic
ewt
MASTER VOLUME

r/v i
STANDBY/ON

es.f
STANDBY

READY
ON STANDBY
TV

pe
ZONE 2

ZONE 3
INPUT

rou
Number DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
+
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

g
1 2 3

s-
buttons GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

e
4 5 6 -

n d
TAPE TUNER CD

ma
7 8 9
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

m
D.TUN

.co
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR

w
MACRO

//ww
1 2 3 ZONE3
Press the [DISPLAY] button to

:
REMOTE MODE

display the available information.

http
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD

TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER DISPLAY
DIMMER SLEEP

U MEN
P MEN U
TO

Band Frequency Preset #


1 Press the [RECEIVER] button,
followed by the [D.TUN] button.
RECEIVER
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.

Listening mode
D. TUN
CLEAR
(Actual display depends on country.) Note:
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see
page 94), its name is displayed instead of the band and
frequency.

2 Within 8 seconds, use the num-


ber buttons to enter the fre-
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3
quency of the radio station.
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
4 5 6
TAPE TUNER CD press 8, 7, 5.
7 8 9
PHONO
+10 0
Note:
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-
ing, you cannot select another input
source with the remote controller.

64
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 65 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Using RDS (not North American


=334
p?t
model)
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are RDS Program Types (PTY)
ic . ph
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-
wt op
v i e
.fr/
cator appears. Type Display

s
None NONE

pee
RDS indicator

u
News reports NEWS

- gro
Current affairs AFFAIRS

e s
and
Information INFO

m
Sport SPORT

. c o m Education EDUCATE

w
//ww
■ What is RDS? Drama DRAMA

:
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of Culture CULTURE

http
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed Science and technology SCIENCE
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail- Varied VARIED
able in most European countries. Many FM stations use Pop music POP M
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,
Rock music ROCK M
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,
Middle of the road music EASY M
news, sport, rock, etc.).
Light classics LIGHT M
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion: Serious classics CLASSICS

PS (Program Service) Other music OTHER M


When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS Weather WEATHER
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press- Finance FINANCE
ing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for Children’s programmes CHILDREN
3 seconds. Social affairs SOCIAL
RT (Radio Text) Religion RELIGION
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text Phone in PHONE IN
information, the text will be shown on the display (see Travel TRAVEL
page 66).
Leisure LEISURE
PTY (Program Type) Jazz music JAZZ
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type
Country music COUNTRY
(see page 66).
National music NATION M
TP (Traffic Program)
Oldies music OLDIES
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 66). Folk music FOLK M
Documentary DOCUMENT
Notes:
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV Alarm test TEST
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the Alarm ALARM
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.

65
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 66 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Displaying Radio Text (RT)


=3 34
p?t
4 To start the search, press

ph
RT/PTY/TP [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds a
ic .
wt
station of the type you specified, at
op
MASTER VOLUME
ENTER

v i e
STANDBY/ON

which point it stops briefly before con-


.fr/
STANDBY

es
READY

ZONE 2
tinuing with the search.
e
ZONE 3

p
ou 5
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

r
When a station you want to listen

s-g
TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

to is found, press [ENTER].

nde
CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

a
If no stations are found, the message
m broadcasting text
ENTER
“Not Found” appears.

c o
When tuned to an RDS station m that’s

w w.
information, the text can be displayed.
w
:// Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
httpRT/PTY/TP
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
once.
The RT information scrolls across the 2 1
display.
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

Notes: STANDBY

READY

ZONE 2

• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV ZONE 3

receiver waits for the RT information. PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL


DVD

TONE
VCR/DVR

HDMI OUT STEREO


CBL/SAT

THX
GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2

TUNING
TAPE TUNER

RETURN
CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

SETUP MIC AUX 2 INPUT


TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display, ON OFF


ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE
CLEAR
PRESET

TUNING
ENTER S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL

no RT information is available.

3
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
2 3 1 4, 5
MASTER VOLUME
1 Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

READY

ZONE 2 TUNER
ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

2 Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button


TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

three times.
CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

RT/PTY/TP

If the current radio station is broadcast-


ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
You can search for radio stations by type. appear on the display and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
1 Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select FM.
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
TUNER

3 To locate a station that is broad-


2 Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
casting TP, press [ENTER].
RT/PTY/TP The AV receiver searches until it finds a
The current program type appears on ENTER
station that’s broadcasting TP.
the display. If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
3 Use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons
to select the type of program you
PRESET want.
See the table on page 65.

66
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 67 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Listening to the Radio—Continued

Presetting AM/FM Stations Selecting Presets


=3 34
ph
PRESET
p?t
ic .
op
2, 4 3 ON STANDBY
TV

ewt
MASTER VOLUME
INPUT

/vi
STANDBY/ON DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
+

r
1 2 3

f
MASTER VOLUME STANDBY

.
READY
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

es
ZONE 2
STANDBY/ON

ZONE 3 4 5 6 -

e
oup
STANDBY
TAPE TUNER CD
READY
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

ZONE 2 7 8 9 PUSH TO OPEN

r
ZONE 3
PHONO D. TUN
TUNING TV VOL

-g
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

+10 0 CLEAR

s
PRESET

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY CLEAR

--/--- 10 11 12

e
ON OFF
PUSH TO OPEN ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

d
TUNING
INPUT SELECTOR
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN

n
SETUP MIC AUX 2 INPUT
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY
TUNING
MODE SETUP MACRO

ma
PRESET

ON OFF
CLEAR 1 2 3 ZONE3
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

REMOTE MODE

m
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

.co
CDR/MD

w
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER

//ww
SAT TAPE/AMP
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite DIMMER SLEEP

:
U MEN

ttp
MEN
AM and FM radio stations. TO
P U

1h
+
Tune into the AM or FM station CH +/– CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL

-
you want to store as a preset. GU
ID E E XI T
PREV SE
TUP RN
CH RE T U

DISPLAY MUTING

2 Press the [MEMORY] button.


MEMORY
The preset number flashes.
To select a preset, use the PRE-
PRESET
SET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
3 While the preset number is flash-
ing (about 8 seconds), use the +
CH
PRESET PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to DISC
ALBUM

select a preset from 1 through 40. -

4 MEMORY
Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station.
Deleting Presets
The station is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
2
favorite stations. MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

Note:
READY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

• You can name your radio presets for easy identifica- PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

tion (see page 94). PHONES POWER


ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY
TUNING
MODE SETUP
TUNING

PRESET
RETURN
SETUP MIC AUX 2 INPUT

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

1 Select the preset that you want to


delete.
See the previous section.

2 TUNING
While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the
MEMORY MODE

[TUNING MODE] button.


CLEAR The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.

67
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 68 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Common Functions

34
This section explains functions that can be used with any

=3
Adjusting Speaker Levels

p?t
input source.

ph
TV CH
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-
.
4 5 6 -

ic
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are
TAPE TUNER CD

op
7 8 9

t
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.
wthe
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

i e
+10 0 CLEAR

v
.fr/ [CH SEL] button to select each
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
Use remote controller’s
s
Press

ee
1 2 3 ZONE3

[RECEIVER]
p
REMOTE MODE
CH SEL

u
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

o
first speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]
-gr
CDR/MD

es
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
SAT TAPE/AMP and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust

and
DIMMER SLEEP

DIMMER TO
P MEN
U MEN
U
SLEEP the volume.

m You can adjust the volume of each

.com
+
LEVEL LEVEL
CH
DISC ENTER VOL speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB

ww
ALBUM

- (–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).


DISPLAY /w
GU T
ID E E XI

: /
PREV SE
TUP RN

http
CH RE T U
MUTING
DISPLAY MUTING

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

LISTENING MODE Notes:


STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST
muted.
CH SEL TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF LEVEL – +
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 86).

■ Headphones
RC-690M

While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the


[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust
MASTER VOLUME the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),
STANDBY/ON
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.
STANDBY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES DIMMER MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to


CLEAR

ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL


ENTER
TUNING

Standby.

PHONES DIMMER DISPLAY

Muting the AV Receiver


Setting the Display Brightness You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
You can adjust the brightness of the display.
Press the remote controller’s
Press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button.
Remote
controller
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to MUTING The output is muted and the MUTING
DIMMER
select: indicator flashes on the display.
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
AV receiver
DIMMER
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote control-
You can also use the AV receiver’s
ler’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The
[DIMMER] button (not European mod-
output is unmuted and the MUTING indicator goes off.
els).
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to
Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
Muting Level setting (see page 96).

68
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 69 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Common Functions—Continued

Using the Sleep Timer Displaying Source Information


t = 334
p h p?the current
.
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that You can display various information about

pic
it turns off automatically after a specified period. input source as follows.
t o
Press the remote controller’s
r /
Remote
v iew the [DISPLAY]
Press button
.f available information.
SLEEP
controller
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to
e s repeatedly to cycle through the
select the required sleep time.
upe
-gro
DISPLAY
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
es
and
AV receiver
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
m
.com
display when the sleep timer has been

w
set, as shown. The specified sleep time
w
://w
DISPLAY
appears on the display for about 5 sec-

http
onds, then the previous display reap-
pears.
The following information can typically be displayed:
SLEEP indicator
Input source
Listening
mode

To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button Signal format*
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears. Sampling
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP] frequency
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep *If the input signal is analog, no format information is
time by 10 minutes. displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling fre-
quency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is
displayed. For some digital input signals, including mul-
Using Headphones tichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,
and sampling frequency is displayed.
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the
PHONES jack. previous display reappears.

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY

READY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL

ZONE 2 OFF
PHONES POWER

ON OFF
ZONE 3

Notes:
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are
not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays
the same.

69
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 70 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Common Functions—Continued

Selecting Audio Inputs Specifying the Digital Signal Format


=3 34
p?t
2 opic
.ph
wt
1
v i e
.fr/
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

s
MASTER VOLUME

ee
LISTENING MODE
STANDBY/ON

p
STEREO SURR

u
STANDBY

o
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

r
READY

PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

-g
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

e s
TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

d
PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

n
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF

ma
AUDIO SEL
TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY
TUNING
MODE SETUP

PRESET

VCR DVD HDD CLEAR

m
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

.co
RC-690M

w
: / / ww
tp
If you connect a component to more than one audio Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital

ht
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the
input signals automatically. However, if you experience
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you sources, you can specify the signal format manually.
want to use to listen to that component. • If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try the PCM setting.
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button • If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-
AUDIO SEL repeatedly to select an audio ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >
Analog.
HDMI: Selects the assigned HDMI
1 Press the [AUDIO SEL] button
repeatedly to select Auto.
IN, and the HDMI indicator
appears on the display. (The
HDMI IN must already be AUDIO SEL

assigned to the current input


selector. See page 48.)
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-
2 While “Auto” is shown on the dis-
play, use the Left and Right
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
IN, and the DIGITAL indica- PCM: Only input signals in PCM
tor appears on the display. format are output, and the
(The DIGITAL IN must PCM indicator lights up. The
already be assigned to the indicator flashes if the input
current input selector. See signal is not PCM.
page 52.) If there is no digital DTS: Only input signals in DTS
signal, the analog input is format are output, and the
used instead. DTS indicator lights up. The
Multich: Selects the multichannel indicator flashes if the input
input, and the ANALOG indi- signal is not DTS.
cator appears on the display. Auto (default): The format is detected
(The multichannel input must automatically. If no digital
already be assigned to the input signal is present, the
current input selector. See analog input is used instead.
page 54.)
Analog: Selects the analog input, and
the ANALOG indicator
appears on the display.

70
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 71 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes


Selecting the Listening Modes Selecting with the Remote Controller
=3 34
ph p?t
U MEN
P MEN U
TO
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the
+

ic .
op
Listening Modes” on page 76.

ewt
CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

/vi
- GU T
ID E E XI

r
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes
f
PREV SE

.
TUP RN
CH RE T U

es
can only be selected if your DVD player is DISPLAY MUTING

pe
connected to the AV receiver with a digital
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
- g rou
es
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

dcheck
• The listening modes you can select depends SURR

a n
on the format of the input signal. To LISTENING MODE ,
mSource Informa-
STEREO STEREO SURR

m
the format, see “Displaying
o
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE

.c
tion” on page 69. PURE A PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST
ALL ST

• While a pairw ofw


://orw
TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

headphones is connected, DIRECT OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF


THX

t p
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ

t
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,
h
VCR DVD HDD

Direct, Stereo listening mode. RC-690M

Selecting on the AV Receiver ■ [STEREO] button


This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
STEREO THX
■ [SURR] button
MASTER VOLUME

STANDBY/ON
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-
STANDBY

READY
ing modes.
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
PHONES POWER
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX

RT/PTY/TP MEMORY
TUNING
MODE SETUP
TUNING

PRESET
RETURN
SETUP MIC AUX 2 INPUT
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE
CLEAR

TUNING
ENTER S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.

PURE AUDIO LISTENING MODE ■ [PURE A] button


This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
■ [PURE AUDIO] button When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode. play is turned off and only the HDMI OUT outputs
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis- video signals.
play is turned off and only the HDMI OUT outputs ■ [DIRECT] button
video signals. Pressing this button again will select This button selects the Direct listening mode.
the previous listening mode.
■ [THX] button
■ [STEREO] button This button selects the THX listening modes.
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.
■ [ALL ST] button
■ [THX] button This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening
This button selects the THX listening modes. mode.
■ LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-
rent input source.

71
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 72 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format


=3 34
Analog and PCM Sources
ph p?t
ic .
PCM
wt op
Multichannel PCM

e
Multi

v i
.fr/
Source format 32–96 176.4/ channel 32–96 kHz 176.4/192 kHz*1

s
kHz 192kHz*1 analog

ee
except */2 */2 2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel 2ch

p
Media
CD, TV, radio,

✔r
o u
DVD DVD DVD

-g
Button Listening Mode

s
nde
[PURE A] Pure Audio ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ma
[DIRECT] Direct ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

m
[STEREO] Stereo ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

.co ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

ww
Multichannel

//w
Dolby D

:
http
Dolby D Plus
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
✔ ✔ ✔
[SURR] Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX ✔
Neo:6 ✔
Neo:6 Cinema ✔ ✔
Neo:6 Music ✔ ✔
Neural THX 5.1 ✔ ✔
Neural THX 7.1 ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Cinema*3 ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx
✔*2 ✔ ✔
THX*3
Neo:6 THX*3 ✔*3 ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
✔ ✔
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔
THX Ultra2 Cinema ✔
THX Music Mode ✔
THX Games Mode ✔
Mono ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
LISTENING MODE*4

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Original DSP
[ ]/[ ]

Unplugged *3
Onkyo

Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
and 88.2 kHz respectively.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

72
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 73 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources


=3 34
ph p?t
.
DSD*1 Dolby D Dolby Digital Plus
Multichannel Multichannel
op ic
Multichannel

wt
Source format
2ch 1/0, 1+1 except 2ch 1/0, 1+1

e
except

i
3/2 2ch */2 */2

r/v
*/2 */2

es.f
Media

e
SACD DVD, DTV, etc. Blu-ray, HD DVD

✔up ✔
Button Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio ✔ ✔
r o ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[DIRECT] Direct ✔
s✔-g ✔✔ ✔✔
✔de ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

an
[STEREO] Stereo ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Multichannel
mm
c o
w.
Dolby D ✔ ✔

w
://w
Dolby D Plus ✔*2 ✔*2

http
DTS, DTS 96/24
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
DSD ✔
Dolby PLII Movie/
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[SURR] Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 Cinema ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 Music ✔ ✔ ✔
Neural THX 5.1 ✔ ✔ ✔
Neural THX 7.1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Cinema*4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 THX ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Ultra2 Cinema ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Music Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Games Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
Mono ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
LISTENING MODE

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Original DSP
[ ]/[ ]

4
Unplugged *
Onkyo

Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

73
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 74 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

TrueHD and DTS Sources


=3 34
ph p?t
.
TrueHD*1 DTS, DTS96/24

op ic DTS-ES

wt
Source format Multichannel Multichannel Discrete/

e
2ch 1/0, 1+1 2ch 1/0
i
except except Matrix

v
*/2 */2

.fr/
*/2 */2

es
Media

e
Blu-ray, HD DVD DVD, CD, etc.
Button Listening Mode
p
u✔ ✔
[PURE A] Pure Audio ✔
- g

ro ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

e

s ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

and
[DIRECT] Direct
[STEREO] Stereo ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
m
.com
Multichannel

w
Dolby D

: / / ww Dolby D Plus

ht tp DTS, DTS 96/24


DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
✔ ✔
✔*2
DTS-HD High Resolution
DTS-HD Master Audio
TrueHD ✔ ✔
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[SURR] Dolby PLIIx Movie*3
Dolby PLII Music/
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Music*3
Dolby PLII Game/
✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Game*3
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX ✔ ✔
Neo:6 ✔ ✔
Neo:6 Cinema ✔ ✔
Neo:6 Music ✔ ✔
Neural THX 5.1 ✔ ✔
Neural THX 7.1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Cinema*4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 THX ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode ✔ ✔
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔ ✔
THX Ultra2 Cinema ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Music Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Games Mode ✔ ✔ ✔
Mono ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
LISTENING MODE*5

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Original DSP
[ ]/[ ]

4
Unplugged *
Onkyo

Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*1. For 96 kHz TrueHD sources, only the Tone audio adjust function is available. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are not supported.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

74
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 75 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

DTS-HD Sources
=3 34
ph p?t
.
DTS-HD High Resolution DTS-HD Master Audio*1
Source format
op ic
wt
Multichannel Multichannel
2ch 1/0 2ch 1/0

i e
except */2 */2 except */2 */2

r/v
es.f
Media
Blu-ray, HD DVD Blu-ray, HD DVD

up✔ e
Button Listening Mode
[PURE A] Pure Audio ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[DIRECT] Direct ✔ r
-g ✔
✔ o ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

es
and
[STEREO] Stereo ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

m
Multichannel

.com
Dolby D

w
ww
Dolby D Plus

: / / DTS, DTS 96/24

ht tp DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix
DTS-HD High Resolution ✔ ✔
DTS-HD Master Audio ✔ ✔
TrueHD
DSD
Dolby PLII Movie/
✔*3 ✔*3 ✔ ✔
[SURR] Dolby PLIIx Movie*2
Dolby PLII Music/
✔*3 ✔*3 ✔ ✔
Dolby PLIIx Music*2
Dolby PLII Game/
✔*3 ✔
Dolby PLIIx Game*2
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX ✔*3 ✔
Neo:6 ✔*3 ✔
Neo:6 Cinema ✔*3 ✔
Neo:6 Music ✔*3 ✔
Neural THX 5.1 ✔ ✔
Neural THX 7.1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
THX Cinema*2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII/
Dolby PLIIx THX
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Neo:6 THX ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Dolby PLII THX Games
Mode
✔ ✔
[THX]
Neo:6 THX Games Mode ✔ ✔
THX Surround EX ✔ ✔
THX Ultra2 Cinema ✔ ✔
THX Music Mode ✔ ✔
THX Games Mode ✔ ✔
Mono ✔*3 ✔*3 ✔*3 ✔*3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
LISTENING MODE

Mono Movie
Orchestra
Original DSP
[ ]/[ ]

Unplugged *4
Onkyo

Studio-Mix ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
TV Logic
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
T-D
*1. For 96 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources, only the Tone audio adjust function is available. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed
at 96 kHz.
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.

Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.

75
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 76 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

About the Listening Modes


Dolby Digital
=3 34
p?t
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital

ph
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
.
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
op ic
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you

wt
high fidelity and stunning surround sound. right in the middle of the action, just like being in a

v i e
.fr/
movie theater or concert hall.
Pure Audio
e s
Dolby EX
eThis mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
ro
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
upchannel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital
s-g
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
e
and
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
m
is turned off, only the HDMI OUT outputs video.)

c o m dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound

w.
Note:
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
w
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected

//w
ttp:
while Zone 2 is on. Dolby Digital Plus
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
h
Direct
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
In this mode, audio from the input source is output channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel- resolution.
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
Dolby TrueHD
output as they are.
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
Stereo space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers. mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
Mono channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono bit sampling rate and signal resolution.
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of 96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DTS NEO:6
DVDs.
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-
Multichannel nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing
sources. a very natural and seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• NEO:6 Cinema
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan- DVD, VHS).
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur- • NEO:6 Music
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener. Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben- CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging. DTS
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx. 5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
• Dolby PLIIx Movie fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround bear the DTS logo.
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS). DTS 96/24
• Dolby PLIIx Music This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, 24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
TV, VHS, DVD). DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
• Dolby PLIIx Game
Use this mode with video games, especially those
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.

76
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 77 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

34
DTS-ES Discrete THX

=3
p?t
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-

ph
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate
ic .
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360- • THX Cinema
wt op
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan
v i e
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear
s .fr/
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-
u p ee
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.
crete soundtrack.
- gr o It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-
DTS-ES Matrix
e s istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the

a nford6.1/7.1-
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks smaller home-theater environment. It can be used

m m
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel with 2-channel sources processed with other for-

c o
w.
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS- mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back
ES logo.
w w speaker output depends on the source material and

:// Resolution the selected listening mode.

http for use with HDTV, including the new video


DTS-HD High
Developed • THX Ultra2 Cinema
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul- This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1 channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal position of the surround source, optimizing the
resolution. ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
DTS-HD Master Audio
• THX Music Mode
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
• THX Games Mode
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
sampling rate and signal resolution.
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz. • THX Surround EX
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Neural THX 5.1/7.1 Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre- as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.

DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-
channel audio.

77
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 78 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Using the Listening Modes—Continued

Onkyo Original DSP Modes


=334
Mono Movie
php?t
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono
ic .
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,
wtop
v i e
.fr/
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other

s
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.
Orchestra
u p ee
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
-g ro
e s
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
d
n
ma
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a

m
large hall.
Unplugged
w .co
/ ww
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this

tp : /
ht
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.

Note:
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.

78
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 79 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Recording

34
This section explains how to record the input source and

=3
Recording from Different AV Sources

p?t
how to record audio and video from separate sources.

ph
Notes: You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-
ic .
op
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot

wt
be recorded. arate sources. This is possible because only the audio

v i e
source is switched when an audio-only input source,

.fr/
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.

s
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video

ee
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input
p
source remains the same.
u
cannot be recorded.

-g r o In the following example, audio from the CD player con-

s
• Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to
e
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-
the manuals supplied with your digital recording
n d
ma
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
equipment for more details.
m
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.

.co
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-

ww
PUSH TO OPEN

puts, and analog input signals are output by only the

: //w
AUX 2 INPUT

analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from

http
digital to analog or vice versa. S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL

• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t


attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the Camcorder
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-
nals, so select another mode when recording. video signal
audio signal

Recording the Input Source HDMI


ASSIGNABLE

RS232 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 OUT

Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas- COMPONENT VIDEO


IN 3 IN 2
ASSIGNABLE
IN 1(DVD) MONITOR
OUT
AM
ANTENNA
FM75

sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or REMOTE


Y

CB/PB
V
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD
MONITOR
OUT V

ZONE 2
IR
IN

CONTROL OUT

DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be DIGITAL

IN 1
ASSIGNABLE
COAXIAL
(DVD) CR/PR S
S OUT

recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con- IN 2 (VCR/DVR)


L
IN

L
IN OUT IN IN IN IN OUT IN IN FRONT CENTER SURR SURR BACK

nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 27 to 43


IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
R R
OPTICAL
PHONO SUBWOOFER
IN 1 CD TAPE AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT VCR/DVR DVD MULTI CH

(GAME/TV)

for hookup information. IN 2


(CD)
GND
ZONE2 R
SURR BACK R
Bi-AMP FRONT R SURR R CENTER SURR L

OUT

FRONT R (BTL)

1 Use the input selector buttons to


select the source that you want
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT to record.
See “Which Connections Should I CD player VCR
GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2
Use?” on page 28 to see which signals
can be output and recorded.
TAPE TUNER CD

PHONO You can watch the source while record- 1 Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
ing it. The AV receiver’s MASTER
Remote
controller VOLUME control has no effect on
DVD

1
VCR/DVR

2
CBL/SAT

3
recording. 2 Prepare the VCR for recording.
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2

4
TAPE

7
5
TUNER

8
6
CD

9
3 Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.

PHONO
+10
4 Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
2 On your recorder, start record-
ing.
5 Start recording on the VCR, then start
playback on the camcorder and CD player.
3 On the source component, start
playback.
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD
player are recorded by the VCR.

Note:
• If you select a different input source during recording,
that input source will be recorded instead.

79
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 80 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Onscreen Setup Menus

34
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-

=3
Menu

p?t
nient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized 1.Input/Output Assign

ph
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu. 2.Speaker Setup

c .
3.Audio Adjust

op i
4.Source Setup

wt
5.ListeningMode Preset

e
6.Miscellaneous

v i
.fr/
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup

ee s
o u p
-g r
d e s
n
Menu Map

mma
.co
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.

w
: / / ww Main menu Submenu

ht tp Menu 1.Input/Output Assign ☞ pages 46–54


1.Input/Output Assign 1.Monitor Out
2.Speaker Setup 2.HDMI Input
3.Audio Adjust 3.Component Video Input
4.Source Setup 4.Digital Input
5.Listening Mode Preset 5.Analog Input
6.Miscellaneous
7.Hardware Setup
8.Lock Setup
2.Speaker Setup ☞ pages 86–92
1.Speaker Settings page 45
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup

6.Miscellaneous ☞ page 96
1.Volume Setup 3.Audio Adjust ☞ page 82
2.OSD Setup page 60 1.Tone Control
2.Direct
3.Multiplex/Mono
4.PL x/Neo:6
5.Dolby EX
6.Theater-Dimensional
7.LFE Level
7.Hardware Setup ☞ page 98
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3
3.Tuner page 61
4.Source Setup ☞ pages 93–94
DVD
4.Analog Multich 1.IntelliVolume
5.HDMI 2.A/V Sync
3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock

8.Lock Setup
☞ page 100
Lock < Unlocked > 5.Listening Mode Preset
☞ page 84
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
5.AUX1
6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
9.CD
10.PHONO

Note:
• The design of the TX-SR805 and TX-SR875 onscreen setup menus is slightly different. The TX-SR805 onscreen
setup menus are used throughout this instruction manual.

80
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 81 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes


Using the Late Night Function
=3 34
ph p?t
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the

ic .
ON STANDBY
TV
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can
op
INPUT

wt
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume

i e
1 2 3 +

v
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you

.fr/
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 -

s
don’t want to disturb anyone.

ee
TAPE TUNER CD

p
7 8 9

u
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

o
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
-gr
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12
RECEIVER

s
INPUT SELECTOR
MODE button, and then press the

nde
MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.
a
REMOTE MODE

m RECEIVER
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital
m
CDR/MD

. c o Plus sources, the options are:


TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER

ww
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP
L NIGHT
Off: Late Night function off
ENTER://w
U MEN
P MEN U
TO

http
+ (default).
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL Low: Small reduction in dynamic
- GU
ID E E XI
T range.
SETUP PREV SE RN
CH TUP
RE T U
High: Large reduction in dynamic
DISPLAY MUTING

range.

REC PLAYLIST RANDOM


For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options
LISTENING MODE
are:
STEREO SURR

REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE


Auto: The dynamic range is con-
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST
trolled automatically based
TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+
on the source material and the
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ
Re-EQ current volume setting
VCR DVD HDD

L NIGHT (default).
RC-690M
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.

Notes:
• The Late Night function can be used only when the
Using the Re-EQ Function input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a Dolby TrueHD.
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh, • The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
making it more suitable for home theater viewing. material that you are playing and the intention of the
This function can be used with the following listening original sound designer, and with some material there
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro will be little or no effect when you select the different
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS- options.
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema, • The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi- receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
channel. it will be set to Auto.

Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


RECEIVER MODE button, followed by the
[Re-EQ] button.
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn
off the Re-EQ function.
Re-EQ

81
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 82 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

Audio Adjust Tone Control Settings


=3 34
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,
ph p?t
.
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-
op ic
wt
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.

v i e
.fr/
1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE ■ Bass
s
RECEIVER MODE button, followed by the
ee
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB
[SETUP] button.
o u p
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.
The main menu appears onscreen.
-g r
d e s ■ Treble
n
SE

ma
TUP You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from

m
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

.co
wUsewthe Up and Down [
Note:

//w buttons to select “3. Audio]/[


• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct
2 : ]

http
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
Adjust,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Audio Adjust menu appears. Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver
3.Audio Adjust
1.Tone Control
1 2
2.Direct MASTER VOLUME

3.Multiplex/Mono
ENTER 4.PL x/Neo:6 STANDBY/ON

5.Dolby EX STANDBY

6.Theater-Dimensional
READY

ZONE 2

7.LFE Level ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The screen for that item appears. 1 TONE
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.

ENTER

2 Use the Up [ ] and Down [


buttons to adjust.
]

4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select an option, and
ENTER
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
buttons to change it.
Notes:
The Audio Adjust menu items are
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when
explained below.
the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-
tening modes.
ENTER

5 When you’ve finished, press the


[SETUP] button.
SE
TUP Setup closes.

82
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 83 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

Direct Setting PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings


=3 34
ph p?t
.
Delay Enable PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)
ic
top back speakers, these
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
■ DSD
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)
i e w
If you’re not using any surround
settings apply v
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,
s . fr/to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
delay, etc., processing when the Pure Audio or Direct lis- e
ePanorama
Logic IIx.
p
tening mode is selected.
ro u ■
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
e s -g With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front
n d
ma
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP. stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music

m
listening mode.

w .co On: Panorama function on.

//ww
Multiplex/Mono Settings Off: Panorama function off (default).
:
http
Multiplex ■ Dimension
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward
■ Input Ch
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV
forward. Lower settings move it backward.
broadcasts, and so on.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
Main: The main channel is output (default).
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
Sub: The sub channel is output.
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out- feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
put. sound, move it backward.

Mono ■ Center Width


With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound
■ Input Ch from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
This setting determines which channel is output when IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source. center speaker, the center channel sound is output by
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center
(default). speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to
L: Only the left channel is output. the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-
R: Only the right channel is output. ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center
■ Output Speaker channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default
This setting determines which speakers output mono value is 3.
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right Neo:6 Music
speakers.
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker ■ Center Image
(default). This setting is unavailable if no surround speakers are
connected.
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The
default value is 3.
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when
the listening position is considerably off center. When
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.

83
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 84 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

Dolby Digital Settings Listening Mode Presets


t = 334
On the Listening Mode Preset menu,hyou
p p?can specify a
■ Dolby EX
.
picTheof the
t o
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han- default listening mode for each audio formats sup-

iew
dled. If you’re not using any surround back speakers, or ported by each input selector. AV receiver will then
Powered Zone 2 is being used (page 101), this setting is
. fr /v
select the listening mode automatically depending on the
unavailable. formats
e modes, although the default listening mode will
elistening
of the input signal. You can still select the other
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select
ro upbe used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.
e
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening
s-g
and
mode.
m
INPUT SELECTOR

.com
Manual: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select 1
MACRO
2 3 ZONE3

any of the listening modes compatible with this REMOTE MODE

ww
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,


//w
CDR/MD

ttp:
etc.).
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER

h
DIMMER SLEEP

U MEN
P MEN U
TO

ENTER +
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL

- GU T
ID E E XI

■ Listening Angle SETUP PREV


CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position. REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-


LISTENING MODE

distant from the listening position and at an angle close


to one of the two available settings.
Front left speaker Front right speaker 1 RECEIVER
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
[SETUP] button.
30˚
The main menu appears onscreen.
SE
TUP

Narrow: Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.


Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Listening
Mode Preset,” and then press
LFE Level Settings ENTER
[ENTER].
The Listening Mode Preset menu
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
appears.
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level 5.Listening Mode Preset
can be set to –∞, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default). ENTER
1.DVD
2.VCR/DVR
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when 3.CBL/SAT
4.GAME/TV
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB 5.AUX1
or –∞ dB. 6.AUX2
7.TAPE
8.TUNER
■ Dolby D 9.CD
10.PHONO
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital
sources.

■ DTS
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.

■ Multich PCM
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)

84
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 85 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued

=3 34
p?t
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select an input selec- tening mode for high resolution
tor, and then press [ENTER].
ic .
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,
ENTER
The audio formats supported by that
top
such as DVD-Audio.
wTrueHD:
input selector appear.
r /v i e
Dolby Specifies the default

s .f listening mode for Dolby TrueHD

p ee
5-x.Listening Mode Preset
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
Analog/PCM Last Valid

r o u
-g
Dolby Digital Last Valid (input via HDMI).
s
ENTER

e
DTS Last Valid

d
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the
n
D.F.2ch Last Valid

ma
D.F.Mono Last Valid
default listening mode for DTS-HD

.co m Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray

winput
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).

w w
If the selector is assigned to an
://
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-

http
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to
select the audio formats shown on the tening mode for DSD multichannel
following screen. sources, such as SACD.

5-x.Listening Mode Preset 5 When you’ve finished, press the


[SETUP] button.
Multich PCM Last Valid
192k/176.4k Last Valid SE
Dolby True HD Last Valid TUP Setup closes.
DTS-HD Master Audio Last Valid
DSD Last Valid

For the TUNER input selector, Analog Note:


is the only format available. • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an audio for-
buttons.

mat, and use the Left and Right


ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-
tening mode.
Only listening modes compatible with
the audio format can be selected (see
page 72).
ENTER
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for analog and PCM
sources.
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.
DTS: Specifies the default listening
mode for DTS sources.
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-
tal or DTS.
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-
ing mode for mono sources in a digital
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.
Multich PCM: Specifies the default
listening mode for multichannel PCM
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via
HDMI).

85
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 86 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup
Speaker Setup 1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
=334
p?t
MODE button, followed by the
ph
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.
.
RECEIVER

c
[SETUP] button.
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the
op i
wt
The main menu appears onscreen.

e
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
v i
s .fr/
pee
INPUT SELECTOR SE
MACRO
TUP

ou
1 2 3 ZONE3

r
REMOTE MODE

s - g
DVD VCR CD ZONE2

nde
CDR/MD

TV CABLE
RECEIVER DOCK RECEIVER

a
SAT TAPE/AMP

2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


m
DIMMER SLEEP

m
ENU MEN

.co
PM
TO
U
buttons to select “2. Speaker
+

w
ENTER Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

ww
CH
ENTER VOL

/
DISC

/
ENTER
ALBUM
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
:
http
- GU T
ID E E XI
SETUP PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING
2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
ENTER 4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
LISTENING MODE

Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 45.
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Config,” and then press [ENTER].
Speaker Configuration ENTER
The Speaker Config screen appears.

These settings are set automatically by the Automatic 2-2.Speaker Config

Speaker Setup function (see page 55). Subwoofer Yes


Front Full Band
Center 100Hz
ENTER
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify Surround 100Hz
Surr Back 100Hz
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency Surr Back Ch 2ch
LPF of LFE 120Hz
for each speaker. Double Bass On

The following crossover frequencies can be specified:


Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 150 Hz, or 200 Hz. 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre- and then use the Left and Right
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre- nected.
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-
nected.
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.
ENTER
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.

86
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 87 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] 8 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “Front,” and buttons to select “Surr Back,”
then use the Left and Right
ic .
and then use the Left and Right

wt op
ENTER ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency.
v i e
crossover frequency.
Note:
s .fr/ If no surround back speakers are con-
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer
u p ee nected, select None.
(step 4) is set to No.
- gr o Notes:

e s • Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set


nd
ENTER ENTER

ma
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45), Sur-

.co m round is set to None (step 7), or Pow-

ww
ered Zone 2 is being used

w
(page 103).
/ /
6http: Use
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
(step 7) is set to anything other than
buttons to select “Center,” and
Full Band.
then use the Left and Right
ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
crossover frequency. 9 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Ch,”
If no center speaker is connected, select and then use the Left and Right
None. ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
Notes: 1ch: Select if one surround back
ENTER
• Cannot set if Speaker Type is set to speaker is connected.
BTL (page 45). 2ch: Select if two (left and right)
• Cannot select Full Band if Front surround back speakers are
(step 5) is set to anything other than connected.
ENTER
Full Band. Note:
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set
7 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surround,” and
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45), Surr-
Back is set to None (step 8), or Pow-
then use the Left and Right
ENTER
ered Zone 2 is being used
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a
(page 103).
crossover frequency.
If no surround left and right speakers
are connected, select None. Continue with step 10 on the next page.
Notes:
ENTER
• Cannot set if Speaker Type is set to
BTL (page 45).
• Cannot select Full Band if Front
(step 5) is set to anything other than
Full Band.

87
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 88 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel Double Bass


=3 34
ph p?t
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
ic .
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).
wt op
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).

v i e
.fr/
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be
e s
esetting
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.

ou p
gr
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to This can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in
sources that use the LFE channel.
s -
nde
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set

a
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select to Full Band.
80 Hz (THX).
m m
o
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off
c
w. Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
(THX).
10 w
Use the
w
:// and then use the Left and Right
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”

http
11 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Double Bass,”
ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select a low- and then use the Left and Right
pass filter frequency. ENTER
[ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
The following low-pass filter frequen- Off (THX): The subwoofer only out-
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX), puts the LFE channel.
90 Hz, 100 Hz, or 120 Hz. On: In addition to LFE channel
ENTER sounds, the subwoofer out-
ENTER
puts front left and right chan-
nel bass sounds.
Continue with step 11 in the next col-
umn.

12 Press the [SETUP] button.


Setup closes.
SE
TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

88
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 89 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Speaker Distance
=3 34
p?t
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “Unit,” and then
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
ic .
op
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

wt
Speaker Setup function (see page 55). ENTER
buttons to select:

v i e
.fr/
feet: Select if you want to enter
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the
distance from each speaker to the listening position.
ee s distances in feet. Can be set

o u p from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot

1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


-g r steps.
MODE button, followed by the
d e s meters: Select if you want to enter
n
ENTER

ma
RECEIVER [SETUP] button. distances in meters. Can be

.co m
The main menu appears onscreen. set from 0.15 to 9 meters in

w
0.15-meter steps.

: / / ww
tp 5
SE Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
ht
TUP
buttons to select a speaker, and
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
ENTER
buttons to specify the distance.
Specify the distance from the speaker
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker to your listening position.
Setup,” and then press [ENTER]. Notes:
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears. • The Center distance cannot be set if
ENTER
Speaker Type is set to BTL
2.Speaker Setup (page 45), or Center is set to None in
1.Speaker Settings the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance • The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-
ENTER 4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings tances cannot be set if Speaker Type
6.THX Audio Setup
is set to BTL (page 45), or Surround
is set to None in the Speaker Config-
uration (page 86).
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “3. Speaker Dis-
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L
distances cannot be set if Speaker
tance,” and then press [ENTER]. Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL
ENTER
The Speaker Distance screen appears. (page 45), Surr Back is set to None in
the Speaker Configuration (page 86),
2-3.Speaker Distance
Unit feet
or Powered Zone 2 is being used
Left 12.0ft (page 103).
Center 12.0ft
ENTER
Right 12.0ft • The Subwoofer distance cannot be
Surr Right 12.0ft
Surr Back R 12.0ft set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).
Surr Back L 12.0ft
Surr Left 12.0ft
Subwoofer 12.0ft
6 Repeat step 5 for each speaker.

Note:
• Speakers that you set to No or None 7 Press the [SETUP] button.
in the Speaker Configuration Setup closes.
SE
(page 86) cannot be selected. TUP

Note:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.

89
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 90 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Speaker Level Calibration


=3 34
p?t
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
ic .
op
bration,” and then press

wt
Speaker Setup function (see page 55). ENTER
[ENTER].

v i e
.fr/
The Level Calibration screen appears
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so
ee s and the pink noise test tone is output by

o u p the front left speaker.


r
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-
ing position.
e s -g ENTER 2-4.Level Calibration

n d Left -12.0dB

ma
Note: Center -12.0dB

m
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, Right -12.0dB

.co
Surr Right -12.0dB
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-
w
Surr Back R -12.0dB

ww
Surr Back L -12.0dB
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful
/
Surr Left -12.0dB

tp : /
because the test tone will be much louder. Subwoofer -15.0dB

ht Note:
1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-
ers set to No or None in the Speaker
RECEIVER [SETUP] button. Configuration (page 86).
The main menu appears onscreen.
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a speaker, and
SE
TUP
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
ENTER
buttons to adjust the level.
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
for the subwoofer).

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].


ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
5 Repeat step 4 for each speaker
so that the volume of the test
tone from each speaker is the
2.Speaker Setup same.
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config If you’re using a handheld sound level
3.Speaker Distance meter, adjust the level of each speaker
ENTER 4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-
6.THX Audio Setup
ing position, measured with C-weight-
ing and slow reading.

6 Press the [SETUP] button.


Setup closes.
SE
TUP

Note:
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.

90
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 91 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Equalizer Settings
=3 34
p?t
4 Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to set the “Equalizer”
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic
ic .
op
option to:

wt
Speaker Setup function (see page 55). Off: Equalizer off, flat response.
i e
ENTER

With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of


.fr/vManual: The equalizer for each
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-
ee s speaker can be set manually.

o u p Audyssey:The equalizer for each


r
ume of each speaker can be set on page 90.
-g
speaker is set automatically

d e s by the Automatic Speaker


n
ma
Setup function.
1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE

.co m
MODE button, followed by the If you selected Manual, continue with

w the next step. If you selected Off or


RECEIVER [SETUP] button.

: / / wwThe main menu appears onscreen. Audyssey, go to step 8.

ht tp 5 Use the Down [ ] button to


SE select “Channel,” and then use
TUP
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
ENTER
tons to select the speaker.
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears. ENTER

2.Speaker Setup
1.Speaker Settings
2.Speaker Config
3.Speaker Distance
ENTER 4.Level Calibration
5.Equalizer Settings
6.THX Audio Setup
6 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a frequency,
ENTER
and use the Left and Right
[ ]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost
that frequency.
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “5. Equalizer You can select: 63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz,
Settings,” and then press 1000 Hz, 2500 Hz, 6300 Hz, or
ENTER
[ENTER]. 16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,
The Equalizer Settings screen appears. ENTER
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or
160 Hz.
2-5.Equalizer Settings
Each band can be cut or boosted from
Equalizer Manual
ENTER Channel Front –6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.
63Hz 0dB
160Hz 0dB Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,
400Hz 0dB
1000Hz 0dB affect bass sounds; high frequencies,
2500Hz 0dB such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.
6300Hz 0dB
16000Hz 0dB

91
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 92 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
7 Use the Up [ ] button to select 2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
“Channel” again, and use the buttons to select “2. Speaker
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to
ic .
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].

wt op
ENTER
select another speaker. ENTER
The Speaker Setup menu appears.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.
v i e
.fr/
2.Speaker Setup

ees
1.Speaker Settings

up
2.Speaker Config

ro
3.Speaker Distance

s-g
ENTER 4.Level Calibration

e
5.Equalizer Settings

and
ENTER 6.THX Audio Setup

m
w.com
wPress 3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

: / / w buttons to select “6. THX Audio

http
8 the [SETUP] button. Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
Setup closes. ENTER
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.
SE
TUP
2-6.THX Audio Setup
Surr Back Sp Spacing 1ft-4ft
THX Subwoofer Yes
BGC Off
ENTER

Notes:
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp
192 kHz input signals. ENTER
Spacing,” and use the Left and
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify
the distance between your sur-
THX Audio Setup round back speakers:
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto- your surround back speakers are
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 55). ENTER
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify surround back speakers are between 1
the distance between your surround back speakers. and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX >4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your sur-
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s round back speakers are more than 4
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the feet (1.2 m) apart.
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners
Note:
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
• This setting is only available if the
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker
Configuration is set to 2ch (page 87).
1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
RECEIVER [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.

SE
TUP

92
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 93 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] 2 Press the [SETUP] button.

ph
buttons to select “THX Sub- The main menu appears onscreen.

c .
SE

i
woofer,” and use the Left and TUP

op
ENTER

wt
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
No: Select this if you do not have
v i e
a THX-certified subwoofer.
s .fr/
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-
p3ee Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
certified subwoofer.
r o u buttons to select “4. Source

e s -g Setup,” and then press [ENTER].


d
ENTER

n
ma
ENTER
The Source Setup menu appears. The

m
name of the currently selected input

.co selector is displayed in a box.

6 / / w wwthe Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


Use
tp:
4.Source Setup

ht
buttons to select “BGC,” and use ENTER
DVD
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but- 1.IntelliVolume
ENTER 2.A/V Sync
tons to select: 3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
Off: Select this to turn off BGC. 5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
• This setting is only available if THX
ENTER Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5). 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The screen for that item appears.

7 Press the [SETUP] button.


The setup menu closes.
SE
TUP
ENTER

Note: 5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select an option, and
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow ENTER

buttons to change it.


buttons.
The Source Setup menu items are
explained below.

Source Setup
ENTER

This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.


Items can be set individually for each input selector.

1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


MODE button, and then use the
RECEIVER
input selector buttons to select
an input source.

DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2

4 5 6
TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9
PHONO
+10

93
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 94 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Name Edit
=3 34
p?t
6 When you’ve finished, press the

ph
[SETUP] button. You can enter a custom name for each individual input
SE Setup closes.
ic .
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When
op
TUP

wt the input selector to which


selected, the custom name will appear on the display.

v i e
1 .fr/ you want to give a custom name.
Select

p e es
ro u To name a radio preset, use the

e s -g [TUNER] button to select AM or FM,


IntelliVolume
n d and then select the preset.

mma
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each

.co 2
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
w
ww
source components is louder or quieter than the others. MODE button, followed by the

: / /
RECEIVER [SETUP] button.

ht tp
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-
tons to set the level.
SE
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use TUP

the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s


noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “4. Source
Note:
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Source Setup menu appears.
A/V Sync
4.Source Setup
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning DVD
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out 1.IntelliVolume
2.A/V Sync
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this ENTER 3.Name Edit
4.Satellite Radio
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be 5.SIRIUS Parental Lock
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond
steps.
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but- 4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “Name Edit,”
tons to set the delay.
and then press [ENTER].
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press ENTER
The Name Edit screen appears.
[ENTER]. Press [ENTER] again when you’ve finished.
4-3.Name Edit
4-2.A/V Sync DVD
DVD Display Default
A/V Sync 100msec Name [ ]
(HDMI LipSync 60msec) ENTER

Press Enter to see picture

If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 99), and your TV


If you’re naming an item for the very
or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay
first time, go to step 6.
time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip
Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses. If the item already has a name, you can
select Default or Custom in step 5.

Note:
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the Pure Audio listening
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.

94
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 95 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

=3 34
p?t
5 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] 9 Press the [SETUP] button.

ph
buttons to select “Display,” and Setup closes.
SE
ic .
op
ENTER use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] TUP

wt
buttons to select:

v i e
.fr/
Default: The default name is dis-
played.
ee s
Custom: The custom name is dis-
o u p
played.
-g r
ENTER

d e s Notes:
n
ma
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press
When Default is selected, the station’s
m
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.

.co
frequency appears on the display when

ww
• You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS
a radio preset is selected.
w
radio presets.
/ /
6 ttp: select the
Press Down [ ] button to • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
h “Name,” and then press receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
buttons.
[ENTER] to open the character
ENTER
input screen.
Satellite Radio
4-3.Name Edit
Name [ ]
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 99). See the
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
ENTER
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
a b c d e f g h i j k o m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z SIRIUS Parental Lock
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see
7 Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select a character, and page 99). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for
ENTER
then press [ENTER]. more information.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10
characters.
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
ENTER
buttons to select the incorrect char-
acter, and then press [ENTER]. The
character input screen opens.
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
buttons to select the correct charac-
ter, and then press [ENTER].

8 When you’ve finished, use the


arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons
ENTER
to display the following screen,
select “OK,” and then press
[ENTER].

4-3.Name Edit
Name [ ]
ENTER

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘
( ) + * = / , : ; ! ? _
OK Cancel

“OK”

95
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 96 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Miscellaneous Setup
=3 34
p?t
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select an item, and
.
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.
ENTER
ic
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
op
wt
buttons to change it.
e
+10

i
0 CLEAR

v
--/--- 10 11 12
The items are explained below.
.fr/
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO

s
1 2 3 ZONE3

pee
REMOTE MODE

RECEIVER ou
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD

- gr
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER

s
SAT TAPE/AMP

e
and
DIMMER SLEEP
ENTER
U MEN
P MEN U
TO

ENTER +

mm
c o
CH

w.
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

w
- GU

://w
ID E E XI T

SETUP PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

http
DISPLAY MUTING

5 When you’ve finished, press the


[SETUP] button.
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
SE
TUP Setup closes.

1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


MODE button, followed by the Note:
RECEIVER [SETUP] button. • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
The main menu appears onscreen.
buttons.

SE
TUP
Volume Setup

■ Volume Display
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select is displayed.
“6. Miscellaneous,” and then Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,
ENTER
press [ENTER]. Max.
The Miscellaneous menu appears. Relative: Display range is –∞ dB, –81.5 dB,
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.
6.Miscellaneous
1.Volume Setup
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value
ENTER
2.OSD Setup 0 dB.

■ Muting Level
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the Muting function is used (see page 68). It can be
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select an item, and
set to –∞ dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in
10 dB steps.
then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The screen for that item appears. ■ Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
ENTER
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.

96
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 97 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

■ Power On Volume OSD Setup


=3 34
p?t
This setting determines what the volume will be each
■ Immediate Display
. ph
time the AV receiver is turned on.

op ic
This setting determines whether operation details are

wt
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,

e
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver
i
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB. v
fr/ (default).
function is used.
.Displayed
e s
upeOff: Not displayed.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver On:

ro
was last turned off, select Last.
Note:
e s -g Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if

n d the input source is connected to a COMPONENT

ma
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.
m
than the Maximum Volume setting.

■ Headphone Level.co
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that
With this setting,w
w
w
Immediate Display be turned off.
/ /
to:the main volume. This is useful if your head-
relativep
you can offset the headphone volume

htt are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you
■ Monitor Type
phones With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your
usually use when listening through your speakers. The TV so that menus are displayed properly.
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB. 4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).
■ Zone2 Maximum Volume 16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for ■ Display Position
Zone 2. This setting determines where on the screen operation
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the details are displayed.
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
Top: Top of the screen.
able this setting, select Off.
■ TV Format
■ Zone2 Power On Volume
See “TV Format Setup (not North American models)” on
This setting determines what the volume will be for
page 60.
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute, ■ Language (TX-SR875 only)
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela- This setting determines the language used for the
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB. onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.

■ Zone3 Maximum Volume


With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 3.
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-
able this setting, select Off.

■ Zone3 Power On Volume


This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-
tive, the range is Last, –∞ dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select Last.

97
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 98 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Hardware Setup
=3 34
p?t
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select an item, and
.
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.
ENTER

ic
use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ]
op
wt
buttons to change it.

v i e The items are explained below.


.fr/
Remote

es
indicator

p e
ON STANDBY

ou 5
TV
INPUT
INPUT

gr
When you’ve finished, press the
-
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
Number
s
1 2 3 +

e
[SETUP] button.

and
buttons GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

-
4 5 6
SE Setup closes.
m
TAPE TUNER CD
TUP

.com
7 8 9
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR

ww
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR

/w
MACRO

tp:/
1 2 3 ZONE3

ht
REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD
CDR/MD
ZONE2
Note:
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
DIMMER

U MEN
SLEEP
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
P MEN U
TO
buttons.
ENTER +
CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

-
Remote Control
GU
ID E E XI T

SETUP PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING ■ Remote ID


When several Onkyo components are used in the same
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
Note:
1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE
MODE button, followed by the
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see
RECEIVER [SETUP] button. below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with
The main menu appears onscreen. the remote controller.

SE
TUP
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID

1 While holding down the


[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
RECEIVER
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
The Remote indicator flashes four
times.
Setup,” and then press [ENTER].
ENTER
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

7.Hardware Setup
1.Remote Control
2.Zone2/Zone3

ENTER
3.Tuner
4.Analog Multich 2 Use the number buttons to enter
ID 1, 2, or 3.
5.HDMI DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3 The Remote indicator flashes twice.

3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select an item, and
ENTER then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
Zone 2 and Zone 3
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 101.

98
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 99 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

Tuner ■ Lip Sync


=3 34
p?t
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize
■ AM Freq Step (on some models)
c . ph
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to
i
wt op
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on the complex digital video processing being performed by

i e
page 61. your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the

.fr/v
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video
■ Satellite Radio (on North American model)
ee s
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS
o u p
receiver.

-g
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold sep-
r
d e s
arately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.

n
ma
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS. Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.

m
Notes:

.co
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible
w
Guide for more information.

ww
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
: / /
tp
Analog Multich
ht
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
■ Subwoofer Input Sensitivity (see page 94).
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their
■ xvYCC
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack. Disable: xvYCC color disabled.
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB. Enable: xvYCC color enabled.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB ■ Control
or 15 dB setting. This function allows CEC-compatible components or
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to
HDMI be controlled with the AV receiver.
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.
■ HDMI Audio Enable: HDMI Control enabled.
This setting determines whether audio received by an
Notes:
HDMI input is output by the HDMI OUT. You may want
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-
to change this setting to On if your TV is connected to
ible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.
the HDMI OUT and you want to listen to audio from an
HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor- • If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select
mally, it should be set to Off. Disable instead.
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default). • When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through
On: HDMI audio is output.
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
Notes: AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-
speakers. tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to receiver’s volume.
Auto.
Power Control
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-
output even if On is selected. nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV HDMI, select Enable.
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through Disable: Power Control disabled.
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the
Enable: Power Control enabled.
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV Notes:
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set- • The Power Control setting can be set only when the
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV above Control setting is set to Enable.
receiver’s volume.

99
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 100 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Advanced Setup—Continued

34
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-
=3
p?t
ible components that support it and may not work

ph
properly with some components due to their settings
or compatibility.
ic .
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more
wtop
v i e
.fr/
power.
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready
ees
mode when set to Standby, and the READY indicator
o u p
lights up instead of the STANDBY indicator (not
-g r
North American model).
d e s
n
ma
TV Control

.co m
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHD-

w
compatible TV connected via HDMI.

: / / ww
Disable: TV Control disabled.

ht tp
Enable: TV Control enabled.
Notes:
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re
note sure about its compatibility.
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above
Control and Power Control settings are both set to
Enable.

Note:
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the
instruction manuals for your other components.

Lock Setup

Lock
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-
ing the setup menus.
Locked: Setup menus locked.
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can
be accessed.

100
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 101 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3

334
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.
t =
p h p? to an
Connecting Zone 2 Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers
pic .
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
Amp in Zone 2
This setup allowsie
t o
w playback in your main lis-
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
r /v 7.1-channel
.f source in each
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
e e s
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,

upHookup
with a different room.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
-gro
to the AV receiver
d e s • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
n
ma
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input

m
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main

.co
on your Zone 2 amp.
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
w • Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-
ww
different source in each room. This is called Powered
: / / nals on your Zone 2 amp.

tp
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV
ht
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.
Main room

Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s TV
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.

Main room

TV AV receiver

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

PRE OUT
AV receiver
Zone 2
ZONE2 R ZONE2 L

IN

R L

Receiver/
integrated amp
Zone 2
R L
Note:
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 104).
You must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act
(Activated) to use this setup (see page 103).

Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45).

101
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 102 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Zone 2 Video Output (TX-SR875 only) Connecting Zone 3


t = 334
The TX-SR875 features a composite video output for
p h p?amp in Zone 3.
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both .
pic3 Speakers
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an

Connecting Your tZone o


iew
audio and video in that zone.
Hookup
r /v
You can fenjoy
s. source to those selected for your main room
2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and
e
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video e
up and Zone 2.
a different
input on your Zone 2 TV.
-g ro
d e s Hookup
n
ma
Main room • Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s

m
TV ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input

w .co on your Zone 3 amp.

: / / ww • Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-

ht tp nals on your Zone 3 amp.

Main room
AV receiver

ZONE 2
OUT TV

Zone 2
AV receiver
TV
ZONE 2 ZONE 3

Note: R

PRE OUT
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video inputs and
Zone 3
S-Video inputs.
IN

R L

Zone 2 12V Trigger


Receiver/
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2 integrated amp
12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliam-
peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo- Note:
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off • With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be
on the AV receiver. set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver
(see page 104).

102
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 103 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Powered Zone 2 Setting


=3 34
p?t
3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

ph
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/
.
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2 ENTER

op ic
Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER].

wt
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 101, you The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.

v i e
.fr/
must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated). 7-2.Zone2/Zone3

p e es Powered Zone2 Not Act

u
Zone2 Out Fixed

gro
Zone3 Out Fixed

-
ENTER

e s
nd
ON STANDBY

ma
TV
INPUT

m
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

.co
1 2 3 +
AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

ww
GAME/TV

4 5 6 -
4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]

//w
TAPE TUNER CD

:
7 8 9
buttons to select “Powered

http
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10
--/--- 10
0
11
CLEAR
12
Zone 2,” and use the Left and
INPUT SELECTOR ENTER

1
MACRO
2 3 ZONE3
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:
REMOTE MODE Not Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD
nals not activated (Powered
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER Zone 2 disabled).
DIMMER SLEEP

TO
P MEN
U MEN
U
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
ENTER + ENTER
nals activated (Powered Zone
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL 2 enabled).
- GU T
ID E E XI
SETUP PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

DISPLAY MUTING

5 Press the [SETUP] button.


REC PLAYLIST RANDOM Setup closes.
SE
TUP

1 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


MODE button, followed by the
RECEIVER Notes:
[SETUP] button.
• When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2
The main menu appears onscreen.
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-
nals output sound, but the surround back speakers con-
SE nected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do
TUP
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the
surround back speakers output sound as normal.
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45).
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
buttons to select “7. Hardware receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow
ENTER
Setup,” and then press [ENTER]. buttons.
The Hardware Setup menu appears.

ENTER

103
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 104 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings


=3 34
p?t
5 Press the [SETUP] button.

ph
Setup closes.
.
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to
ic
SE

op
TUP
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you
v i ewt
.fr/
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV

es
receiver.
p e
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE u • This procedure can also be performed on the AV
Note:
1
s - gro
e
MODE button, followed by the
d
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow

anonscreen.
RECEIVER [SETUP] button. buttons.
The main menum
om
appears

w . c
w
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3
: // w
http
SE
TUP
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.
ZONE3
ZONE2
TONE
2 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]
buttons to select “7. Hardware MASTER VOLUME

Setup,” and then press [ENTER].


STANDBY/ON

ENTER STANDBY

The Hardware Setup menu appears.


READY

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PURE AUDIO AUDIO SEL DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT GAME/TV AUX 1 AUX 2 TAPE TUNER CD PHONO DISPLAY

PUSH TO OPEN

TUNING
ZONE 2 OFF LEVEL TONE HDMI OUT STEREO THX RETURN AUX 2 INPUT
SETUP MIC
TUNING
PHONES POWER RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE SETUP

PRESET

CLEAR
ON OFF
ZONE 3 DIGITAL INPUT LISTENING MODE S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITAL
ENTER
TUNING

ENTER

OFF
,

3 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


buttons to select “2. Zone 2/ STANDBY ON STANDBY

ENTER
Zone 3,” and then press [ENTER]. ON
TV
INPUT

The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears. DVD

1
VCR/DVR

2
CBL/SAT

3 +
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

7-2.Zone2/Zone3
INPUT 4 5 6 -

SELECTOR TAPE TUNER CD

Powered Zone2 Not Act 7 8 9


Zone2 Out Fixed PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10 0 CLEAR
Zone3 Out Fixed
--/--- 10 11 12
ENTER INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
1 2
REMOTE MODE
3 ZONE3
ZONE3
DVD VCR CD
CDR/MD
ZONE2
ZONE2
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
SAT TAPE/AMP

4 Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ]


DIMMER

TO
PM
ENU MEN
U
SLEEP

buttons to select “Zone 2 Out” or


+
“Zone 3 Out,” and use the Left CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ENTER ALBUM

and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to - GU T


ID E E XI
select: PREV
CH
SE
TUP
RE T U
RN

MUTING
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume DISPLAY MUTING

must be set on the amp in that


zone. REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

ENTER
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-
LISTENING MODE
ume can be set on the AV STEREO SURR

receiver. REPEAT
PURE A
AUDIO
DIRECT
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
THX ALL ST

TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+

OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF LEVEL–,


AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ
VCR DVD HDD LEVEL+
RC-690M

104
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 105 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Selecting an Input Source for Zones


=3 34
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-

p?t
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for

1 On the remote controller, press


c . ph
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for
i
wt op
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] Zone 3.

i e
Remote

v
REMOTE MODE button.
r/ Zones
controller

e s .fOff
e
ZONE3
Turning

oup
On the AV receiver, press the

gr
ZONE2 [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
s -
ndecurrently
1 On the remote controller, press

a
AV receiver The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]
m
Remote
REMOTE MODE button.
selected foro m
flashes, and the input selector
ZONE 2 controller

play.w.
c the zone appears on the dis- ZONE3

w w On the AV receiver, press the


://
http
ZONE2 [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
ZONE 3
AV receiver The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
2 On the remote controller, use the
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.
ZONE 2 flashes.
Remote
controller
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

1 2 3
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 On the AV receiver, use the input ZONE 3
4
TAPE
5
TUNER
6
CD
selector buttons, or press the
7
PHONO
8 9 [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button
repeatedly
2 On the remote controller, press
the [STANDBY] button.
+10
Remote
The input source is selected, the zone is controller
turned on, the name of the input selec- STANDBY On the AV receiver, press the
tor appears on the display, and the [OFF] button.
AV receiver ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights
ZONE 2 continuously. The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
AV receiver or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
OFF

ZONE 3

Notes:
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selec- Note:
tor button repeatedly. On the North American model, • When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the
you can also select XM or SIRIUS. ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,
are unavailable.
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/
Standby and Direct Change functions do not
work.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.

105
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 106 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Adjusting the Volume of Zones Muting Zones


=3 34
ph p?t
c .
Remote

i
On the remote controller, press On the remote controller, press
op
controller

wt
ZONE3
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]

i e
ZONE3

v
REMOTE MODE button, and then REMOTE MODE button, and then

.fr/
ZONE2

s
ZONE2 use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] press the [MUTING] button.
buttons.
u p ee
r o To unmute a zone, on the remote

e
On the AV receiver, press the
s-g controller, press the [ZONE 2] or

and
LEVEL LEVEL
MUTING
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button, [ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,
m
.com
press the [LEVEL] button, and and then press the [MUTING] but-
then use the Up [ ] and Down ton again.
w
ww
AV receiver
[ ] buttons.
: / /
ht tp
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2

1 On the AV receiver, press the


[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
AV receiver
ZONE 2
Adjusting the Balance of Zones

1 On the AV receiver, press the


[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button. ZONE 3
AV receiver
ZONE 2
2 TONE
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select Bass
or Treble.

ZONE 3

2 Press the AV receiver’s [TONE] 3 Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]


TONE buttons to adjust the bass or tre-
button repeatedly to select Bal-
ble.
ance.
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.

3 Use the Up [ ] and Down [ ]


buttons to adjust the balance.
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB
to the left in 2 dB steps.

Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out
setting is set to Fixed (page 104).
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-
ting is set to Fixed (page 104).

106
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 107 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued

Using the Remote Controller in Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet


=3 34
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
ph
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
p?t
ic .
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
op
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
wt
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.

i e
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
.fr/v
zone.
ee s
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
o u p
-gr
IR Receiver
Connecting

s
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line

nde
block
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
a
mmZone 2/3
it’s installed inside a cabinet. IR IN

Using a Multiroom.Kit c owith


w w
: / / w
httpsignals from the remote controller and feeds
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
Inside
infrared cabinet Remote controller
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
Signal flow
connecting block.

Using a Multiroom Kit with Other


Components
IR Receiver
Connecting
block In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
Remote controller up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.
Main room Zone 2/3
IR Receiver
Signal flow Connecting
block
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be IR IN
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown AV receiver
IR OUT
below. IR Emitter
From the connecting block

Remote controller
Miniplug cable Other component

IR
IN

Signal flow

OUT
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
AV receiver IR OUT jack, as shown below.

Miniplug cable
Other component

Remote control
sensor

IR
Emitter
IN
Miniplug

IR Emitter
OUT

AV receiver
Signal flow

107
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 108 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Controlling Other Components

34
You can control your other components, including those

=3
2 While holding down the REMOTE

p?t
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.
MODE button to which you want

ph
REMOTE MODE
This section explains how to:
.
to enter the code, press the
c
DVD VCR
• Enter the remote control code for a component that
op i
[STANDBY] button.

wt
CD
TV
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.
e
CDR/MD

i
The Remote indicator lights up.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s CABLE

.fr/v
s
SAT

ee
remote controller (see page 111).
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence
o u p
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 112).
- gr
STANDBY

e s
Entering Remote Control Codes
m and
. c omyou must first enter that
wwcontrol code to a REMOTE MODE
To control another component,
3 Within 30 seconds, use the num-
/ / w
: need to enter a code for each component
component’s remote

httyoup want to control.


ber buttons to enter the 4-digit
button. You’ll DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
remote control code.
1 2 3
that GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2
The Remote indicator flashes twice.
4 5 6
TAPE TUNER CD

Remote 7 8 9

STANDBY indicator 0
ON STANDBY
TV
INPUT

DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT TV I


1 2 3 +
Number GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 -
buttons TAPE TUNER CD

PHONO
7 8 9
D. TUN TV VOL
4 Press the REMOTE MODE button
again to select the remote con-
+10 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
troller mode, point the remote
1 2
REMOTE MODE
3 ZONE3
controller at the component, and
REMOTE
DVD VCR CD
CDR/MD
ZONE2 check the operation.
MODE TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
RECEIVER If the remote controller doesn’t work as
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP
expected, and several remote codes are
U MEN
MEN
TO
P U
listed, try each one in turn and use the
+
CH
one that works best.
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

- GU

PREV SE
TUP
ID E E XI
T

RN
Notes:
CH RE T U

DISPLAY MUTING • Remote control codes cannot be entered for the


[RECEIVER] and [DOCK] REMOTE MODE but-
tons.
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

• The remote control codes provided are correct at the


STEREO
LISTENING MODE
SURR
time of printing but subject to change.
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+


• The DOCK remote mode can only be used with
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL L NIGHT Re-EQ
the Onkyo RI Dock at this time.
VCR DVD HDD
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons
RC-690M
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD
players and CD players, respectively.
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control
code to the [CD] REMOTE MODE button.
1 Look up the component’s remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category.

108
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 109 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued

Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
t = 334
You can reset a REMOTE MODE buttonpto?its default
ph
Components Connected via

ic .
op down the REMOTE
Onkyo components that are connected via are con- remote control code.
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
ew tholding
1 i
r/vMODE
While
f
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.
e s . button that you want to
e
REMOTE MODE

p
reset, press the TV [ ] button.
sure the Onkyo component is con- ou
DVD VCR

1 Make g r The Remote indicator flashes three


s-
CD
TV

e
nected with an cable and an analog CDR/MD
times.
n d
ma
CABLE
audio cable (RCA). SAT

See page 43 for details.


. m
co remote control code
2 to the w
Enter the
w w
appropriate
: / /
http
REMOTE MODE button.

• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button


5002: Onkyo DVD player with 2 Press the REMOTE MODE button
again.
REMOTE MODE
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button DVD VCR The Remote indicator flashes twice,
6002: Onkyo CD player with CD
indicating that the button has been
TV
CDR/MD reset.
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button CABLE
SAT
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE
MODE buttons are preprogrammed
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button with remote control codes for control-
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-
ers, respectively. When these buttons
See the previous page for how to enter remote are reset, the preprogrammed codes are
control codes. restored.

3 Press the REMOTE MODE button, point


the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.
Resetting the Remote Controller
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via , use
the following remote control codes: 1 While holding down the
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button RECEIVER
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.
5001: Onkyo DVD player without (default) The Remote indicator flashes five
times.
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button
STANDBY
6001: Onkyo CD player without (default)

• [MD] REMOTE MODE button


6007: Onkyo MD recorder without

• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button 2 Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE


MODE button again.
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without RECEIVER
The Remote indicator flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
Note: has been reset.
• If you connect an -capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-
ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 51).

109
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 110 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued

34
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select
=3
p?t
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons

ph
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.

ic .
■ Controlling a TV ■ Controlling a VCR
wt op
■ Controlling a Satellite or

Press [VCR] firstr/v i e Cable Receiver


Press [TV] first
e s .f Press [CABLE] (SAT) first

e
-g r oup
A
e s
ON STANDBY

d
ON STANDBY ON STANDBY

A
TV

5 A TV TV

n
INPUT
INPUT INPUT

ma
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
1 2 3 + + +
3 1 2 3

2
1 2 3

m
2
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

.co 6
4 5 6 - 4 5 6 - 4 5 6 -
2 TAPE TUNER CD
TAPE TUNER CD TAPE TUNER CD

ww
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

//w
+10 0 CLEAR
+10 +10
0 CLEAR 0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12

:
--/--- 10 11 12 --/--- 10 11 12
INPUT SELECTOR

3 3

http
INPUT SELECTOR INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO
MACRO MACRO
1 2 3 ZONE3
1 2 3 ZONE3 1 2 3 ZONE3
REMOTE MODE
REMOTE MODE REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
DVD VCR CD ZONE2 DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD
CDR/MD CDR/MD

TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER


TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
SAT TAPE/AMP
SAT TAPE/AMP SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP
DIMMER SLEEP DIMMER SLEEP
U MEN
MEN

8 8 9 8
U MEN U MEN
U MEN MEN

8
P
TO

9
P U P U
TO TO

+ + +
3 4
CH

4
DISC ENTER VOL CH CH
ALBUM DISC ENTER VOL DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM ALBUM

PREV
-
SE
GU
ID E E XI
T

RN
8 - GU
ID E E XI
T
9
- GU
ID E E XI
T
8
4
PREV PREV

7
TUP SE RN SE
CH RE T U TUP TUP RN
RE T U RE T U
5
CH CH

DISPLAY MUTING 5 DISPLAY MUTING


9 DISPLAY MUTING 6
8 8
8
7
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM
REC PLAYLIST RANDOM REC PLAYLIST RANDOM

LISTENING MODE
6 LISTENING MODE LISTENING MODE
STEREO SURR
STEREO SURR STEREO SURR
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE REPEAT AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST
PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST PURE A DIRECT THX ALL ST

TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+


TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+ TEST TONE CH SEL LEVEL- LEVEL+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD 7 AUDIO SEL
VCR
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD
AUDIO SEL
VCR
L NIGHT
DVD
Re-EQ
HDD

RC-690M RC-690M RC-690M

A [ON], [STANDBY], TV [ ]* A [ON], [STANDBY] A [ON], [STANDBY]


Set the TV to On or Standby. Set the VCR to On or Standby. Set the satellite/cable receiver to
B Number buttons On or Standby.
B Number buttons
Enter numbers. Enter numbers. B Number buttons
C [CLEAR] Enter numbers.
C [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*
Select channels on the TV. Cancels functions. C [CLEAR]
D [CH +/–] Cancels functions.
D [PREV CH]
Selects the previous channel. Selects channels on the VCR. D [CH +/–]
E [PREV CH] Selects satellite/cable channels.
E [TV INPUT]*
Selects the TV’s external inputs. Selects the previous channel. E [PREV CH]
F REC [ ] Selects the previous channel.
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*
Adjust the TV’s volume. Starts recording. F [GUIDE]
Displays the program guide.
G [MUTING] G Eject [ ]
Mutes the TV. Ejects the videocassette. G [ ], [ ]
Rewind and Fast forward.
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/ H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ]
[ENTER]/[RETURN] Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
Navigate menus on the TV. Fast forward. [ENTER]/[RETURN]
Navigate menus on the satel-
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/
lite/cable receiver.
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) [ENTER]/[RETURN]
are exclusively for controlling a TV Navigate menus on the VCR.
and can be used at any time, regard-
less of the currently selected remote
controller mode.

110
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 111 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued

Learning Commands
=3 34
p?t
3 Point the remote controllers at

ph
each other, about 2 to 6 inches
.
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press
op ic
wt
and hold the button whose com-
example, the Play command from your CD player’s
v i e
mand you want to learn until the

.fr/
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
s
Remote indicator flashes.

ee
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
p
If the command is learned successfully,
u
[ ] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
-gr o the Remote indicator flashes twice.

d e s

R
remote control code (page 108) but some buttons don’t

E
n

M
LU
VO
ma

G
TIN
U
M
work as expected.

L
ST E

E
TEON

EV
T L
SE
m

H
C
.co

T
SE
ER E
D

N PR

PE
VD
C

TA
D
CH
TI- T

TU
UL PU

O
N
M IN

R O

P
TO H

U
C P

O
R
RE
About 2 to 6

G
SUOD

LE R
w

SE E

C
M

T UN

-2

IS
D
EO

D
PU T

C
ER

VID
M
Remote

PE
IM

IN
ww

-1
D

TA

EO
P

VID
EE
inches (5–15 cm)

VD
SL

D
/

ER
W
/

PO
indicator
:
htt1p
ON STANDBY
TV

O
N
D

ST
INPUT

V
D

AN
GA

D
M

BY
E/T

DC
4

R/D
TA
P

VR
2
E

AU
7
PH

I
X1
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT

CB
ON

5
+1

T
TU

L/
O

V
--

SA
0 10 UT S CR

N
/-

3
ER

T
-- INP M 2

AU
8

IN
PU
+

X2
1

T
6
1 2 3

0 11 TOR

CD

+
DV

T
E O

V
A
D

LE

D.T R

C
C

UN
CLE

H
-
R

A 12
EM
TV CH

VC
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2

T
O

V
R

TE

VO
CA

3
M

L
O
BL
SA

D
E

E
C
T

C
-

D
4 5 6

ZO
/M
DO

NE
D
CK

3
ZO
RC-690M

NE
2
RE /AM EP
TA

CE
TAPE TUNER CD

PE LE

IVER P
S
7 8 9
PHONO D. TUN TV VOL

+10

4
0 CLEAR
--/--- 10 11 12 To learn more commands, repeat
INPUT SELECTOR
MACRO steps 2 and 3.
1 2 3 ZONE3

REMOTE MODE Press any REMOTE MODE button


1, 4
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD when you’ve finished.
TV CABLE DOCK RECEIVER
SAT TAPE/AMP
DIMMER SLEEP
Notes:
U MEN
MEN
TO
P U
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
+ REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV [ ],
CH
DISC
ALBUM
ENTER VOL
TV [INPUT], TV CH [+]/[–], TV VOL [ ]/[ ],
- GU
ID E E XI
T Light.
PREV SE
TUP RN
CH RE T U
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
DISPLAY MUTING
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,
1 While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR which you want to use the com- controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
mand, press the [ON] button. DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
CD
CDR/MD
TV
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
The Remote indicator lights up.
CABLE DOCK mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
SAT
(see page 109).
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP • To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
ON
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
2 Press the button you want to
learn the new command.

111
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 112 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Controlling Other Components—Continued

Using Macros
=3 34
p?t
2 Press the buttons whose actions

ph
you want to program into the
.
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
ic
macro in the order you want them
op
wt
performed.

i e
Example:
v
For the CD example in the left column,
.fr/
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
s
you’d press the following buttons:
ee
ing actions:
p
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button
ro u REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.
e s -g
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
n d 3 When you’ve finished, press the

ma
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to MACRO button again.

.co
select the CD input source.
m The Remote indicator flashes twice.
w
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select
ww
If you enter eight commands, the pro-
/ /
the CD remote controller mode.
:
tp
cess will finish automatically.

ht
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the
CD player.
Note:
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are
You can program a MACRO button so that all five taught new commands, the macro will no longer work
actions are performed with just one button press. properly and will have to be made again.

Making Macros Running Macros


Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to eight commands.
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]
button.
Remote
The commands in the macro are trans-
indicator
ON STANDBY
TV
mitted in the order in which they were
DVD VCR/DVR CBL/SAT
INPUT
programmed. Keep the remote control-
1 2 3 + ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
GAME/TV AUX1 AUX2 TV CH

4 5 6 - of the commands have been transmit-


TAPE TUNER CD

7 8 9
ted.
TV VOL
PHONO
+10 0
D. TUN
CLEAR
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
MACRO --/--- 10 11
INPUT SELECTOR
12
less of the current remote controller
1, 2, 3 1
MACRO
2 3 ZONE3
mode.
REMOTE MODE
DVD VCR CD ZONE2
CDR/MD
REMOTE
MODE
TV CABLE
SAT
DOCK RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
RECEIVER
DIMMER SLEEP

TO
P MEN
U ME N
U
Deleting Macros
+
CH
DISC ENTER VOL
ALBUM

1 While holding down the


[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-
1 While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button of the remote con-
RECEIVER ton, press the MACRO button
REMOTE MODE
whose macro you want to delete.
DVD VCR troller mode you want to use at
CD
TV
the start of the macro, press
CDR/MD
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].
CABLE DOCK
SAT
The Remote indicator lights up.
RECEIVER
TAPE/AMP
For the CD example in the left column,
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]
REMOTE MODE button, and then 2 Press the MACRO button again.
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].

112
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 113 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Troubleshooting

34
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a • If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,

=3
p?t
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to

ph
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer. unmute the AV receiver (page 68).

ic .
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
wt op
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
v i e
speakers (page 69).
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
s .fr/
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source

ee
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR] component. On some game consoles, such as those
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”
o u p
r
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.
-g
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
s
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
enter Standby mode.
n d e audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button

mma on your DVD player’s remote controller.


STANDBY/ON

.co
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use

ww
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 40).

/ / w
VCR/DVR

tpthat: resetting the AV receiver will delete your


• Check the speaker settings (pages 86–91).

h t
Note
radio presets and custom settings.
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it
to Auto (page 70).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.
Power
Only the front speakers produce sound
Can’t turn on the AV receiver • When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
outlet properly. • In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5 output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
seconds or more, then plug it back in again. (page 83).
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on Only the center speaker produces sound
• The amp protection circuit has been activated. • If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi- Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources, source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV pro-
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon- gram, the sound will be concentrated in the center
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord speaker.
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver • In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input (page 83).
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the • Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and The surround speakers produce no sound
contact your Onkyo dealer. • When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,
the surround speakers produce no sound.
Audio • Depending on the source and the current listening
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 71).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned to the input • Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
selector (page 52). The center speaker produces no sound
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected • When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center
(page 70). speaker produces no sound.
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed • In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
in all the way (page 27). output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is (page 83).
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the • Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 22).
The surround back speakers produce no sound
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-
• Check the volume (page 62). The AV receiver is
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 71).
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround
volume range for precise adjustment.
back speakers with some sources.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
113
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 114 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued

34
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the • When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
=3
p?t
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur- stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-

ph
round back speakers produce no sound (page 101). ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to

ic .
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
op
The subwoofer produces no sound

wt
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
e
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE
v i
.fr/
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
s
switch formats immediately, you may not hear any-
ee
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).
p
thing, in which case you should stop your player for
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
ro u about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.
s
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are
e -g • With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback

n d
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the

ma
DTS material properly even though your player is con-
source component is connected to an analog input.
m
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is

.co
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
w
ww
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45). (e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency

: / /
tp
There’s no sound with a certain signal format response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-

ht
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source
component. On some game consoles, such as those
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you
may hear noise.
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off. The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an can’t be heard
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button • Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
on your DVD player’s remote controller. HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback nals, sound may not be output immediately.
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur- Video
round back speakers produce no sound (page 101).
There’s no picture
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected
in all the way (page 27).
while Zone 2 is on.
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-
The volume cannot be set to +18 dB (99) nected.
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set • On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
(page 96). the AV receiver is connected is selected.
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been • While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI OUT
been adjusted (pages 68 and 90), the maximum vol- outputs video signals.
ume may be reduced. • If your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT, set the
Noise can be heard HDMI Monitor setting to Yes (page 46), and select “-
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 48 to watch
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio composite video, S-Video, and component video
performance, so don’t use them. sources.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try • If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
repositioning your cables. OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No (page 46),
and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input
The Late Night function doesn’t work Setup” on page 50 to watch composite video and
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 81). S-Video sources.
The analog multichannel input doesn’t work • If the video source is connected to a component video
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 32). input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to NENT VIDEO OUT or HDMI OUT (page 28).
the input selector (page 54). • If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT
(page 70). (page 28).
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player. There’s no picture from a source connected to
About DTS signals an HDMI IN
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause, • When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player Resolution setting is set to anything other than
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal- Through (see page 46), no video is output by the
function. HDMI OUT.

114
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 115 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued

34
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV • To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
=3
p?t
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not , point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be

ph
support the current video resolution and you need to sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
select another resolution on your DVD player. (page 109).
ic .
wt op
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
e
The onscreen menus don’t appear
v i
.fr/
via , or another manufacturer’s component, point
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
s
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to
ee
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
p
enter the appropriate remote control code first
The picture is distorted
ro u (page 108).
• On non-North American models, specify the TV sys-
e s -g
d
Can’t learn commands from another remote
n
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on

ma
controller
page 60.

.co m • When learning commands, make sure that the trans-

w mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at

ww
Tuner
/ /
each other.

tp :
ht
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers • Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
from hiss, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
light up be learned, especially those that contain several
• Relocate your antenna. instructions.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-
puter. Recording
• Listen to the station in mono (page 63).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote Can’t record
controller may cause noise. • On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference. selected.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals. • To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
antenna. with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
Remote Controller • When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, video
recording is not possible because no video signals are
The remote controller doesn’t work output. Select another listening mode.
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-
rect polarity (page 14). Others
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction The sound changes when I connect my head-
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s phones
remote control sensor (page 14). • When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control- mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
ler mode (page 15). Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio, in which case it stays the
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control same.
code (page 108).
How do I change the language of a multiplex
Can’t control other components source
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control- • On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-
ler mode (page 15). ting to Main or Sub (page 84).
• If you’ve connected an -capable Onkyo MD
The functions don’t work
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN • To use , you must make an connection and an
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK, nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
respectively (see page 51). tally (page 43).
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the functions
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
don’t work.
more than one code is listed, try each one.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function The AV receiver’s display doesn’t work
to learn the commands of the other component’s • The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-
remote controller (page 111). ing mode is selected. Select another listening mode.
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
115
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 116 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Troubleshooting—Continued

=334
p?t
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-

ph
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,

ic .
op
severe interference, noise from an external source, or

wt
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
v i e
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back
s .fr/
ee
in again.

o u p
-g r
e
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
d s
n
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by

ma
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
m
.co
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-

ww
rectly.

/ / w
ttp:toAmerican
hreceiver
For North and Australian models, set the AV
Standby before disconnecting the power
cord from the wall outlet. For other models, set the AV
receiver to Standby and the POWER switch to OFF
before disconnecting the power cord.

116
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 117 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Specifications
Amplifier Section Video Section
=3 34
Rated Output Power Input Sensitivity/Output
ph p?t
TX-SR805: Level and Impedance
i .
1 Vp-p /75Ω (Component and S-Video Y)
c
op
North American: 0.7 Vp-p /75Ω (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)

wt 0.28 Vp-p /75Ω (S-Video C)


130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm

v i e
.fr/
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a 1 Vp-p /75Ω (Composite)
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
s
Component Video

ee
150 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm

p
Frequency Response 5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB

u
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)

-g ro
s
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm Tuner Section
d e
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
n
ma
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
■ FM
m
European:

.co
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC) Tuning Frequency Range
Asian:
w North American: 87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz

ww
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
/ /
European and Asian: 87.5 MHz– 108.0 MHz

tp :
ht
TX-SR875:
North American: ■ AM
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm Tuning Frequency Range
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a North American: 530 kHz–1710 kHz
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
European: 522 kHz–1611 kHz
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total Asian: 522 kHz–1611 kHz
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC) 530 kHz–1710 kHz
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC) Preset Channel 40
European:
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Asian: General
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power Power Supply AC 120 V, 60 Hz
TX-SR805: AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asian: AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA) Power Consumption
TX-SR875: North American: 9.5 A
Asian: European and Asian: 870 W
7 ch × 250 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA) Dimensions
Dynamic Power (W × H × D) 435 × 194 × 458.5 mm
TX-SR805: 300 W (3Ω, Front) 17-1/8" × 7-5/8"× 18-1/16"
250 W (4Ω, Front) Weight
150 W (8Ω, Front)
North American: 23.1 kg
TX-SR875: 320 W (3Ω, Front)
270 W (4Ω, Front) 50.9 lbs.
160 W (8Ω, Front) European and Asian: 23.3 kg
THD (Total Harmonic 51.4 lbs.
Distortion) 0.05% (Power Rated)
Damping Factor 60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8Ω) ■ Video Input
Input Sensitivity and HDMI
Impedance 200 mV/ 47 kΩ (LINE) TX-SR805: IN 1, IN 2, IN 3
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM) TX-SR875: IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4
Output Level and Component IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3
Impedance 200 mV/ 470 Ω (REC OUT) Composite AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
Phono Overload 70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%) VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
Frequency Response 5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode) S-Video AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,
Tone Control ±10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS) VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2
±10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A) ■ Video Output
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A) HDMI OUT
Speaker Impedance 4Ω–16Ω Component MONITOR OUT
Composite VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT
S-Video VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT

■ Audio Inputs
Digital Inputs COAXIAL (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3),
OPTICAL (IN 1, IN 2), DIGITAL
Analog Inputs PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2
Multichannel Inputs 7.1 ch

117
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 118 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Specifications—Continued

■ Audio Outputs
=334
p?t
Digital Output OPTICAL (OUT)

ph
Analog Outputs TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR
ic .
wtop
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)

e
Multichannel Pre

v i
.fr/
Outputs 7

s
Subwoofer Pre Outputs 1

ee
Speaker Outputs ZONE2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,
o u p
SURR BACK L, ZONE2 L
-g r
Phones PHONES
d e s
n
ma
■ Control Terminal
MIC Yes
.co m
w1
RS232
: / / ww
ht tp
IR Input/Output
12 V Trigger Out
1/1
1
USB No

Specifications and features are subject to change without


notice.

118
TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 119 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM

Memo

=334
php?t
ic .
wtop
v i e
s .fr/
u p ee
-g ro
d e s
n
mma
w .co
: / / ww
ht tp
t =334
p hp?
.
wt opic
v ie
es .fr/
p e
-g rou
es
m and
. c om
w
:// ww
http

Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124

ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION


18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452
HOMEPAGE
http://www.onkyo.com/
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039 Printed in Japan
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/ I0705-3

SN 29344449B
(C) Copyright 2007 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
120 * 2 9 3 4 4 4 4 9 B *

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen